You are on page 1of 244

PANIMALAR ENGINEERING COLLEGE

Bangalore Trunk Road, Varadharajapuram, Nasarathpettai,


Poonamallee Chennai, Tamil Nadu 600123

DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL
ENGINEERING

II Year - Question Bank


2016 – 2017 (EVEN)
VISION OF THE INSTITUTE:
To transform the budding engineers into academically excellent,
highly intellectual and self-disciplined engineering graduates to mould
them as good citizens with the spirit of integrity and morality that would
cater to the needs of our nation.

MISSION OF THE INSTITUTE:


To impart quality education with high standards of excellence in
engineering and technology, with the help of an excellent infrastructure in
a serene and conductive atmosphere this would motivate the students in
their pursuit of knowledge in the field of engineering and technology.

VISION OF THE DEPARTMENT:


To build young Technocrats by imparting their technical knowledge
in the field of civil engineering, by laying the foundation for future
engineers, who can meet the demands of industry and community
effectively in all part of civil works and to make significant contribution in
the economic development of the state, region and nation

MISSION OF THE DEPARTMENT:


The department of civil engineering efforts will be dedicated to
formulate and implement high quality education in civil engineering, to
promote innovative and original thoughts in the minds of civil engineers to
face the future challenges, technology, research and consultancy with
global linkages.
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES [PEOS]
The educational objectives of UG program in Civil Engineering are:
PEO 1
To educate the graduates with the basic and advanced knowledge in civil
engineering and to apply the fundamentals of mathematics, science,
management and computing in Engineering principles.
Learning and Incubation
PEO 2
To motivate themselves in getting engineering position and practice with
structural design, construction industries in private and government sectors at
the national and international levels. Mastery and Career Contribution
PEO 3
To succeed and prepare the civil engineering graduates in lifelong independent
learning and work effectively on team based projects to become good
entrepreneurs and conduct themselves ethically, socially in their professional
environment. Sustained Learning
PEO 4
Graduates will be made aware of causes of impacts due to the development and
also to identify remedial measures if necessary.
Awareness of Social impact
PEO 5
To prepare students to become successful design engineers, R&D scientists.
Civil Engineering Graduates will exhibit interest in leading to professional
licensure or higher studies in engineering that provides for continued
development of their technical ability and management skills.
Continuous Learning
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)
PSO 1
Draft specification: Select material, prepare estimates/costing, schedule
work plans.

PSO 2
Experimentation: Apply knowledge of different fields of Civil
Engineering, conduct experiments, analyze, interpret data and design the
system components.

PSO 3
Project inception and design: Conceptualize projects related to different
fields of Civil Engineering, collect relevant data by direct and indirect
methods, analyze the project requirement and design the project.
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)
a) An ability to apply fundamental knowledge of mathematics, science &
Engineering.
b) To analyze a problem identifies, formulate & use the appropriate computing
and civil engineering requirements for obtaining its solution.
c) Design & Conduct experiments as well as to analyze & interpret data.
d) Understand the knowledge of contemporary issues on structural,
geotechnical, water resources, transportation, GIS & Construction
management.
e) Design the needs with realistic constraints such as economic,
environmental, social, political, ethical, health & safety, contractibility &
sustainability.
f) Implement the technical knowledge in the investigation of problems, data
collection in civil engineering projects.
g) Effectively use the IS codes and American standard codes and to apply in
their higher studies in civil engineering discipline.
h) Use the techniques and modern construction tools to meet the requirements
of construction industry.
i) To develop construction business, public policies, business administration
& in self placement.
j) Improve the leadership skills, career advancement & active participation in
professional bodies in the community.
k) Identify the function effectively in multidisciplinary team & evaluate the
performance of team & individual team member.
l) Communicate effectively, in writing clear reports, prepares documentation
& presentation in any topic.
m) Engage lifelong learning process in civil engineering as relevant to rapid
changing of technology.
INDEX

S.No NAME OF THE SUBJECT Page No

1 MA6459-Numerical Methods 1-60

2 CE6401- Construction Materials 61-92

3 CE6402- Strength of Materials 93-135

4 CE6403- Applied Hydraulic Engineering 136-171

5 CE6404- Surveying II 172-196

6 CE6405- Soil Mechanics 197-235


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

MA6459
NUMERICAL
METHODS

Page 1 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

MA6459 NUMERICAL METHODS

UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 10+3

Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations -Fixed point iteration method

–Newton Raphson method-Solution oflinear system of equations -Gauss elimination method


Pivoting -Gauss Jordan method –Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel -Matrix
Inversion by Gauss Jordan method -Eigen values of a matrix by Power method.

UNIT II INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION 8+3

Interpolation with unequal intervals -Lagrange's interpolation –Ne to ’s di ided diffe e e


interpolation –Cubic Splines -Interpolation with equal intervals -Ne to ’s fo a d
andbackward difference formulae.

UNIT III NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 9+3

Approximation of derivatives using interpolation polynomials -Numerical integration using


T apezoidal, “i pso ’s 1/3 ule –Ro e g’s ethod -Two point and three point Gaussian
quadrature formulae –E aluatio of dou le i teg als y T apezoidal a d “i pso ’s 1/3 ules.

UNIT IV INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL

EQUATIONS 9+3

Single Step methods -Taylo ’s se ies ethod -Eule ’s ethod -Modified Eule ’s ethod -Fourth
order Runge-Kutta method for solving first order equations-Multi step methods -Mil e’s a d
Adams-Bash forth predictor corrector methods for solving first order equations.

UNIT V BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIAL

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Finite difference methods for solving two-point linear boundary value problems

-Finite differe e te h i ues fo the solutio of t o di e sio al Lapla e’s a d Poisso ’s


equations on rectangular domain –One dimensional heat flow equation by explicit and implicit
(Crank Nicholson) methods –One dimensional wave equation by explicit method.

TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

Page 2 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

1. Grewal. B.S., and Grewal. J.S.,"Numerical methods in Engineering and Science", Khanna
Publishers, 9thEdition, New Delhi, 2007.

2. Gerald. C. F., and Wheatley. P. O., "Applied Numerical Analysis", Pearson Education, Asia, 6th
Edition, New Delhi, 2006

REFERENCES

1. Ka dasa y, P., Thilaga athy, K. a d Gu a athy, K., Nu e i al Methods , “.Cha d Co.


Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
2. Bu de , R.L a d Fai es, T.D., Nu e i al A alysis , “e e th Editio , Tho so Asia Pvt.
Ltd., Singapore, 2002.

Page 3 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

PANIMALAR ENGINEERING COLLEGE


DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL
COURSE INFORMATION SHEET

PROGRAMME : CIVIL ENGINEERING DEGREE : B.E YEAR OF STUDY :


2016-2017
COURSE: NUMERICAL METHODS SEMESTER: FOURTH, CREDITS : 3
COURSE CODE : MA6459 REGULATION : 2013 COURSE TYPE : CORE
COURSE AREA/DOMAIN : CONTACT HOURS: 5

CORRESPONDING LAB COURSE CODE: LAB COURSE NAME :

COURSE PRE-REQUISTIES
C.CODE COURSE NAME DESCRIPTION YEAR/SEM

MA6459 NUMERICAL METHODS Gives a complete procedure for II/IV


solving different kinds of
problems occur in engineering
numerically.

COURSE OBJECTIVES
The roots of nonlinear equations, solutions of large system of linear equations and
eigenvalue problem of a matrix can be obtained numerically where analytical methods
1.
fail to give solution.

When huge amounts of experimental data are involved, the methods discussed on
interpolation will be useful in constructing approximate polynomial to represent the data
2.
and to find the intermediate values.

The numerical differentiation and integration find application when the function in the

3. analytical form is too complicated or the huge amounts of data are given such as series of
measurements
The methods introduced in the solution of ordinary differential equations and partial
4.
differential equations will be useful in attempting any engineering problem.

Page 4 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

COURSE OUTCOMES
SNO DESCRIPTION
CO 1 To solve non – linear and system of equations
CO 2 To find polynomials in the given range of values.
CO 3 To understand numerical differentiation and integration.

CO 4 To solve Ordinary Differential equations.


Co 5 To identify and deal with boundary value problems.

COURSE SPECIFIC OUTCOMES


SNO DESCRIPTION
CSO 1 To solve non linear system of Equation by Matrix method and interpolation
method.
CSO 2 To understand numerical integration and differentiation by various methods

CSO 3 To Solve Ordinary and Partial differential Equations with initial value and
boundary values

Mapping Course Aims along with Course Final Results

Course
Course
S.No. Course Objectives specific
Outcomes
Outcomes
1. The roots of nonlinear equations, solutions CO1,CO2 CSO1
of large system of linear equations and
eigenvalue problem of a matrix can be
obtained numerically where analytical
methods fail to give solution.

2. When huge amounts of experimental CO2, CO3 CSO1,CSO2


data are involved, the methods discussed on
interpolation will be useful in constructing
approximate polynomial to represent the
data and to find the intermediate values.

Page 5 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

3. The numerical differentiation and CO3,CO4 CSO3,CS02


integration find application when the
function in the analytical form is too
complicated or the huge amounts of data
are given such as series of measurements
4. The methods introduced in the solution of CO3 ,CO4,CO5 CSO2,CSO3
ordinary differential equations and partial
differential equations will be useful in
attempting any engineering problem.

Page 6 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

NUMERICAL METHODS

UNIT-I : Solution of equations and eigen values


PART-A

1. State the order of convergence and the criterion for the convergence in Newton’s
method. [M/J 12,N/D14,N/D15]
The order of convergence of Newton Raphson method is 2 ( quadratic ) and
convergence condition is f ( x) f ( x)   f ( x) .
2

2. What is Newton’s algorithm to solve the equations x2 = 12 ? [N/D 10]


Given : x 2  12
x 2 12  0
Let f x   x 2 12
Hence f x   2 x
By Newton Raphson method,
f xn 
xn 1  xn 
f xn 

 xn 
x n  12
2

2 xn
2 x n  x n  12 x n  12
2 2 2

 
2 xn 2 xn
3. Evaluate 15 using Newton-Raphson’s formula. [M/J14]
Let x  15
Hence x 2  15  0
Let f x   x 2  15 and f x   2 x
Now f 3  32  15   6 = -ve
f 4  4 2  15  1 = + ve
Therefore, the root lies between 3 and 4
By Newton Raphson method, we have
f xn 
xn 1  xn  Let x0  3.5
f xn 
f  x0  f 3.5
x 1  x0   3.5   3.89
f x0  f 3.5
f x1  f 3.89
x 2  x1   3.89   3.87
f x1  f 3.89
f x2  f 3.87 
x 3  x2   3.87   3.87
f x2  f 3.87
Therefore, the value of 15 is 3.87 .
4. Using Newton’s method, find the root between 0 and 1 of x3 = 6x – 4 [N/D11]
Given x 3  6 x  4
x3  6 x  4  0
Let f x   x 3  6 x  4
Hence f x   3 x 2  6
Let x0  0

Page 7 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC
f xn 
By Newton’s formula, xn 1  xn 
f xn 
f  x0  4 2
x1  x0   0   0.67
f x0   6 3
f x1  0.2807
x2  x1   0.67   0.7303
f x1   4.6533
f x2  0.0076
x3  x 2   0.7303   0.732
f x2   4.3999
Hence the root is 0.73
5. Write the iterative formula for finding N where N is a real number, by
Newton’s method. [N/D 06,A/M 08,A/M15]
Let x  N
Hence x 2  N  0
Let f x   x 2  N
Hence f x  2 x
f xn 
By Newton method, xn 1  xn 
f xn 
x N
2
 
1  N
 xn   xn  
n

2 xn 2  xn 
6. Derive Newton’s algorithm for finding the p th root of a number N , where N  0 .
[N/D15]
Let x p  N  0
Let f x  x p  N
Hence f x   p x p 1

By Newton method, xn 1  xn 
f xn  x p N
 x n  n p 1 

p xn p  xn p  N 
f xn  p xn p x n p 1
 p 1 xn p  N
 .
p x n p 1
7. Write Newton-Raphson formula to obtain the cube root of N. [N/D10]
1

Let x  N 3

Hence x 3  N  0
Let f x   x 3  N
Hence f x   3 x 2
f xn 
By Newton’s formula, xn 1  xn 
f xn 

xn  1  xn 
x n
3
N  . 
3x n  x n  N
3 3


2 xn  N
3

2 2 2
3 xn 3x n 3 xn
8. Find an iterative formula to find the reciprocal of a given number N. [M/J13]
1
Let x 
N
1 1
Hence N  , N   0
x x

Page 8 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC
1 1
Let f ( x )  N  and f ( x ) 
x x2
1
f  xn  N 
xn  1  xn  hence xn  1  xn  x , xn  1  2 xn  N xn2
f   xn  1
x2

9. Write down the order of convergence and the condition for convergence of fixed
point iteration method. [N/D12]
What do you mean by the order of convergence of an iterative method for
finding the root of the equation f x  0 . [N/D13]

Order of convergence = 1
Given f x  0
Write f x  as x   x provided  x  1 for all x in I .
10. Write sufficient condition for convergence of an iterative method for f x  0 ;
written as x  g x . [A/M10]

g x  1 ,  xI
11. Find the positive root of x2 + 5x – 3 = 0 using fixed point iteration starting with
0.6 as first approximation. [N/D08]
Given : x  5 x  3
2

x x  5  3
3
x
x5

Let   x   where  x  1 ,  x 0 ,1 


3
x5

By fixed point formula, x n 1   x n 


Let x0  0.6

x 1    x0    0.6 
3
 0.5357
0.6  5

x 2    x1    0.5357  
3
 0.5419
0.5357  5

x3    x 2    0.5419  
3
 0.5413
0.5419  5

x 4    x3    0.5413 
3
 0.5413
0.5413  5
Hence the root is 0.5413 .
12. Solve e x  3 x  0 by the method of iteration. [N/D11]
Let us consider,
f x   e x  3 x
f ( 0 )   ve
f (1)   ve
Hence I = ( 0, 1)
Given e x  3 x  0

Page 9 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

1 x
Which implies , x  e
3
ex
Let  x   where  x  1 ,  x 0 ,1 
3
By fixed point formula, x n 1   x n 
Let x0  1 ( After 10th iteration, α = 0.62 )
Hence the root is 0.62 .
13. Give two methods to solve a system of linear equations. [M/J 12,N/D15]

Gauss Elimination method and Gauss Jordan method.


14. What are the advantages of iterative methods over direct methods for solving a
system of linear equations? [N/D12]

Direct method Iterative method


i) We get exact solution i) Approximate solution
ii) Simple, take less time ii) Time consuming laborious.
15. Using Gauss elimination method, solve x + y = 2, 2x + 3y = 5. [M/J09,A/M11]

1 1 2  1 1 2
The augmented matrix is [A,B] =     R2  R2  2 R1
2 3 5 0 1 1

By back substitution, x  y  2 ----(1)


y 1
(1) becomes, x 1  2
x 1
Hence x  1 and y  1 .

16. Solve the system of equations x – 2y = 0, 2x + y = 5 by Gauss elimination method.


[M/J06]
1  2 0 1  2 0
The augmented matrix is A , B     R2  R2  2 R1 1
2 1 5 0 5 5
1  2 0 R
  R2  2
0 1 1 5
By back substitution x  2 y  0 ……………(1)
y 1
Equation (1) becomes x  2  0
x2
Hence, x  2 and y  1 .
17. Solve the system of equations 2x + 3y = 11, 4x – y = 1 by Gauss elimination
method. [A/M11]
2 3 11 2 3 11 
The augmented matrix is [A,B] =     R2  R2  2 R1
4  1 1 0  7  21
By back substitution, 2 x  3 y  11 ----(1)
 7 y   21  y  3
(1) becomes, 2 x  9  11
2x  2  x 1
Hence x  1 and y  3 .

Page 10 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

18. Using Gauss elimination method solve 5 x  4 y  15 , 3 x  7 y  12 . [M/J14]


The augmented matrix is

A , B  
5 4 15

3 7 12
5 4 15
  R2  5 R2  3 R1
0 23 12
15
By back substitution, we have 5 x  4 y  15 and 23 y  15 implies y 
23
 15  60 285 57
5 x  4    15 implies 5 x  15   implies x 
 23  23 23 23
57 15
Hence x  and y  .
23 23
19. Solve the equations x  2 y  1 and 3 x  2 y  7 by Gauss Elimination method.
[N/D13]
The augmented matrix is

A , B  
1 2 1

3  2 7
1 2 1
  R2  R2  3R1
0  8 4 
1
By back substitution, we have x  2 y  1 and  8 y  4 implies y  
2
 1 1
x  2     1 implies x  1  1 implies x  2 . Hence x  2 and y   .
 2 2

20. Write down the condition for the convergence of Gauss-Seidel iteration scheme.
[M/J 07,A/M 08]
The absolute value of the leading diagonal element is greater than the sum of the
absolute values of the other elements in that row, which is called diagonally
dominant.

21. Which of the iterative methods for solving linear system of equations converge
faster? Why? [A/M15]
In Gauss Seidel method the latest values of unknowns at each stage of iteration are
used in proceedings to the next stage of iteration. Hence the convergence in Gauss
Seidel method is faster than Gauss Jacobi method.

22. Write the procedure involved in Gauss Jordan method. [A/M15,N/D15]


In Gauss Jordan, the co-efficient matrix is reduced to a diagonal matrix with row
operations and we get the solution without using the back substitution method.

23. Compare Gaussian elimination and Gauss-Jordan methods in solving the linear
system[ A ] { X } = { B }. [N/D07]

Page 11 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Gauss Elimination Gauss Seidel


i.Direct method i.Indirect method
ii.Used to find inverse of ii. Used to solve system of
the matrix also. equations only

iii.Diagonally dominant condition iii. Diagonally dominant condition


is not insisted. is insisted.
1 3
24. Find the inverse of A    by Gauss-Jordan method. [N/D08,N/D14]
2 7
 A , I   
1 3 1 0

 2 7 0 1

1 3 1 0
   R2  R1  2 R2
0 1  2 1 
1 0 7  3
 
1 2 1 
 R1  R1  3 R2 
 I , A 1
0
 7  3
Hence A 1    .
 2 1 
25. What is the use of Power method ? [M/J13]
Power method is used to find the dominant eigen value.
26. Write down the procedure to find the numerically smallest Eigen value of a
matrix by power method. [A/M10]
Procedure:
(i) Find A  1
(ii) Find the largest eigen value  of A  1 and eigen vector v of A  1 using
power method.
1
(iii)Smallest eigen value of A  and the corresponding eigen vector = v .

27. Define Eigen value and Eigen vector. [N/D07]
Let A be a square matrix of order n . We can find a column matrix X and a
constant  such that A X   X .
On expansion of A   I  0 , we get n th degree equation in  called the
characteristic equation. Its roots  i  i  1, 2 , ...... , n  are called eigen values and the
corresponding to each eigen value,  A   I  X  0 will have a non-zero solution
X  x1 x2 ........ xn  which is known as the eigen vector.
T

28. To what kind of a matrix, can the Jacobi’s method be applied to obtain the
Eigen values of a matrix? [N/D 10]
Symmetric matrix.

Page 12 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

PART-B
1. Solve for a positive root of the equation x 4  x 10  0 using Newton-Raphson
method. [A/M10]
2. Find the approximate root of x e  3 by Newton’s method correct to 3 decimal
x

places. [A/M11]
3. Find an iterative formula to find the reciprocal of a given number N and hence
1
find the value of . [N/D11]
19
4. Find the Newton’s iterative formula to calculate the reciprocal of N and hence find
1
the value of . [N/D12]
23
5. Using Newton’s method find the real root of x log 10 x  1.2 correct to five decimal
places. [A/M10,N/D13,A/M15]
6. Find by Newton-Raphson method, the real root of e  2 x 1 0 correct to four
x

decimal places. [A/M11]

7. Using Newton’s method, find the root between 0 and 1 of x 3  6 x  4 correct to 2


decimals. [M/J12]
8. Find by Newton’s Raphson method a positive root of the equation
3 x  cos x 1  0 . [N/D14]
9. Using Newton Raphson method find the real root of f x   3 x  sin x   e x  0 by
choosing initial approximation x0  0.5 . [A/M15]

10. Find the smallest positive root of 3 x  1 sin x correct to three decimal places
by iterative method. [N/D10]
11. Solve e  3 x  0 by the method of fixed point iteration.
x
[M/J12,N/D15]
12. Find the root of 4 x  e x  0 that lies between 2 and 3 by Newton-Raphson
method. [N/D15]
13. By Gauss elimination method find the inverse of the given matrix
4 1 2
 
A   2 3 1 . [A/M10]
1  2 2 
 
14. Using Gauss elimination method, solve x  2 y  z   5 , x  y  6 z   12 and
3x y z  4. [N/D11]
15. Solve by Gauss elimination method 3 x  4 y  5 z  18 , 2 x  y  8 z  13 and
5 x  2 y  7 z  20 . [M/J12]
16. Apply Gauss – Jordan method to solve the following system of equations
x  y  z  9 , 2 x  3 y  4 z  13 , 3 x  4 y  5 z  40 . [A/M11]
17. Apply Gauss – Jordan method to find the solution of the following system
10 x  y  z  12 , 2 x  10 y  z  13 , x  y  5 z  7 . [N/D11]
18. Solve the system of equations by Gauss-Jordan method; 5 x1  x2  9 ;
 x1  5 x2  x3  4 ;  x2  5 x3   6 . [M/J14]

Page 13 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

19. Using Gauss-Jordan method to solve 2 x y 3z  8,  x2 y z  4,


3x y4z  0 . [N/D14]

 0 1 2
 
20. Find the inverse of the matrix by Gauss – Jordan method  1 2 3  . [A/M10]
3 1 1
 
0 1 1 
 
21. Find the inverse of the matrix A   1 2 0  using Gauss-Jordan method.
 
 3 1  4 
[N/D11]
4 1 2
 
22. Find the inverse of A   2 3 1 by using Gauss-Jordan method.
 
1  2 2 
[N/D10,N/D15]

23. Using Gauss-Jordan method, find the inverse of the matrix


1 1 3
1 3  3 . [M/J12]

 2  4  4
1 2 6 
24. Using Gauss-Jordan method, find the inverse of the matrix 2 5 15  . [N/D12]
6 15 46
 3 1 1 
 
25. Find the inverse of the matrix   15 6  5  using Gauss-Jordan method. [N/D13]
 
 5 2 2 

2 2 6
26. Using Gauss-Jordan method, find the inverse of 2 6  6

 
4  8 8 
[M/J14,A/M15,N/D15]

27. Using Gauss-Seidel iterative method to obtain the solution of the equations
9 x  y  2 z  9 , x  10 y  2 z  15 , 2 x  2 y 13 z  17 . [A/M10]
28. Solve by Gauss-Seidel method, the system of equations 20 x  y  2 z  17 ,
3 x  20 y  z  18 , 2 x  3 y  20 z  25 . [N/D10]
29. Solve the following system by Gauss-Seidel method, x  y  54 z  110 ,
27 x  6 y  z  85 , 6 x  15 y  2 z  72 . [A/M11]
30. Solve by Gauss-Seidel method, the following system, 28 x  4 y  z  32 ,
x  3 y  10 z  24 , 2 x  17 y  4 z  35 . [N/D11,N/D15]

Page 14 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

31. Apply Gauss-Seidel method to solve the equations 20 x  y  2 z  17 ,


3 x  20 y  z  18 , 2 x  3 y  20 z  25 . [M/J12,N/D14]

32. Solve the following system of equations by Gauss-Seidel method: 8 x  3 y  2 z  20


; 4 x  11 y  z  33 ; 6 x  3 y  12 z  35 . [N/D10]
33. Solve the given system of equations by Gauss-Seidel method 8 x  y  z  18 ;
2 x 5 y  2 z  3 ; x  y 3 z   6 . [A/M11]
34. Solve the following system of equations using Gauss-Seidel method
10 x  2 y  z  9 , x  10 y  z   22 ,  2 x  3 y  10 z  22 . [N/D12,N/D13]
35. Using Gauss-Seidel method, solve the following system of linear equations
4 x  2 y  z  14 ; x  5 y  z  10 ; x  y  8 z  20 . [M/J14,A/M15]
36. Solve the following system of equations, starting with the initial vector of 0 , 0 , 0
using Gauss-Seidel method 6 x1  2 x2  x3  11 ,  2 x1  7 x2  2 x3  5 ,
x1  2 x2  5 x3   1 . [A/M15]
37. Solve the following system by Gauss-Seidel iterative procedure : 10 x  5 y  2 z  3 ,
4 x 10 y  3 z   3 , x  6 y  10 z   3 . [N/D15]
38. Find the dominant Eigen value and the corresponding Eigenvector of the matrix
1 6 1
 
A  1 2 0 . [A/M10]
 0 0 3
 
39. Find by power method, the largest Eigen value and the corresponding Eigenvector of
 1 3 1
 
a matrix A   3 2 4  with initial vector 1 1 1 .
T
[N/D10]
 1 4 10 
 
40. Determine the largest eigen value and the corresponding eigen vector of the matrix
 1 3  1
 
 3 2 4  with 1 0 0  as the initial vector by power method.
T
[N/D13]
  1 4 10 
 
41. Find the largest Eigen value and corresponding eigen vector of a matrix
1 6 1
 
 1 2 0  by using Power method. [N/D 11,N/D15]
 0 0 3
 

42. Determine the largest Eigen value and the corresponding Eigen vector of the matrix
 2 1 0 
1 2 1 . [M/J 12,A/M15 ]
 
 0 1 2 
 25 1 2 
 
43. Find numerically largest eigen value of A   1 3 0  and the corresponding
 2 0  4
 
eigen vector. [N/D10,N/D11,M/J14,N/D14]

Page 15 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

1 2
44. Find the dominant eigen value of A    by power method and hence find the
3 4
other eigenvalue also. [M/J12]
5 0 1 
45. Find all the eigen values of A  0  2 0 using power method. [A/M15,N/D15]
 
1 0 5

UNIT-II : Interpolation
PART-A

1. Define the terms interpolation and extrapolation. [M/J09]


The process of computing the value of a function inside the given range is called
interpolation. The process of computing the value of a function outside the given
range is called extrapolation.
2. What do you understand by inverse interpolation? [N/D07]
It is the process of finding the values of x corresponding to a value of y, not present
in the table.

 2  E ex
3. Evaluate   e x . 2 x . [N/D09]
E  e
xh
e  e
x
e x

 e  e e  e x  eh  1 e x
x x h
 

2 e x  e h  1 e x
2

 2  x
  2
 2
 2
 
  e  E 1 2 e x  E 1 e h 1 e x  e h 1 E 1 x  e h 1 e x  h
E
  
 2  x E e x exh

2
  e . 2 x  e h 1 e x  h .  
e2 x
 ex .
E  e e 1 e
h 2 x
e x
 
4. Name two interpolation methods for unequal intervals. [M/J12]

(i) Newton’s divided difference method.


(ii) Lagrange’s method.

5. Find the polynomial which takes the following values [N/D06]


x 0 1 2
y 1 2 1
Difference table
x y y 0 2 y 0
0 1
1
1 2 -2 Newton’s forward formula
-1 u u 1 2
y  y 0  u y 0   y0 where
2 1 2!
x  x0 x 0
u  x
h 1

Page 16 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

x  x 1
y  1  x (1)   2   x 2  2 x 1 .
2
6. Write down Newton’s forward and backward difference formula. [N/D07]
Newton’s forward interpolation formula :
u u 1 2 u u 1u  2 3 x  x0
y  y 0  u y 0   y0   y 0  ....... where u 
2! 3! h
Newton’s backward interpolation formula :
u u  1 2 u u  1u  2  3 x  xn
y  y n  u y n   yn   y n  ....... where u  .
2! 3! h
7. Write the Newton’s forward difference interpolation formula. [A/M08,
N/D10,M/J13,N/D13]
Newton’s forward interpolation formula :
u u 1 2 u u 1u  2 3 x  x0
y  y 0  u y 0   y0   y 0  ....... where u 
2! 3! h
8. A third degree polynomial passes through ( 0, -1 ) , ( 1 , 1 ) , ( 2 , 1 ) and ( 3 , 2 )
Find its value at x = 4 ? [M/J09]
Difference table
x y y 0 2 y 0 3 y 0
0 -1
2
1 1 -2
0 -1
2 1 -3
-3
3 -2
Newton’s forward formula
u u 1 2 u u 1u  2 3 x  x0 x 0
y  y 0  u y 0   y0   y 0 where u   x
2! 3! h 1
x x 1
y   1  x (2)   2  x x 1x  2  1
2 6
y
1
6

 x 3  3 x 2  16 x  6
Hence y 4  
581
.
3

9. Find the interpolating polynomial for the given data: [A/M10].

x -1 0 1 2
f 4 2 2 4
Difference table
x y y 0 2 y 0 3 y 0
-1 4
-2
0 2 2
0 0
1 2 2
2
2 4

Page 17 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Newton’s forward formula


u u 1 2 x  x0 x 1
y  y 0  u y 0   y 0 where u    x 1
2! h 1
y  4  x  1 (2) 
x  1x  2
2
y  x2  x  2 .
10. Fit a polynomial from the following data using Newton’s forward difference
interpolation formula [A/M11]

x 0 2 4 6
f 2 4 14 32
Difference table

x y y 0 2 y 0 3 y 0
0 2
2
2 4 8
10 0
4 14 8
18
6 32

Newton’s forward formula


u u 1 2 x  x0 x0 x
y  y 0  u y 0   y 0 where u   
2! h 2 2
    x  2  
   8
x x 1
y  2    (2)    
2  2  2  2 
y  x2  x  2
11. Given y 0  3 , y1  12 , y 2  81 , y 3  200 , y 4  100 . Find 4 y 0 . [A/M15]
Difference table

x y y 0 2 y 0 3 y 0 4 y 0
0 3
9
1 12 60
69 -10
2 81 50 -21
119 -31
3 200 19
-100
4 100
Hence the value of 4 y 0   21.

Page 18 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

  f x 
12. Prove that  log  f  x   log  1 
f  x  
. [A/M11 ]

 f x   f x  h   f x 
R.H .S  log  
 f x  
 f x  h 
 log    log f x  h  log f x   log f x  L.H .S
 f x  
13. Find a polynomial for the following data by Newton’s backward difference
formula [M/J06]

x 0 1 2 3
f(x) -3 2 9 18

Difference table
0 -3
5
1 2 2
7 0
2 9 2
9
3 18
x y y n  2 yn  3 yn

Newton’s backward interpolation formula is

u u  1 2 x  xn x 3
y  y n  u y n   y n where u    x 3
2! h 1
y  18  x  39 
x  3x  2 2
2
y  x  4 x 3
2

14. State Newton’s backward difference formula. [N/D12,N/D14]


Newton’s backward interpolation formula :

u u  1 2 u u  1u  2  3 x  xn
y  y n  u y n   yn   y n  ....... where u  .
2! 3! h
15. When to use Newton’s forward interpolation and when to use Newton’s
backward interpolation? [N/D10]
Newton forward formula is used for interpolating near x 0 (the beginning of the
table) and backward formula is used for interpolating near x n (end of the table).
16. Obtain the divided difference table for the following data [M/J06]
x 2 3 5
y 0 14 102
Divided difference table
2 0
14  0
 14
3 2
3 14 44  14
 10
102  14 52
 44
5 102 53
Page 19 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

17. Obtain the divided difference table for the following data [N/D06]

x -1 0 2 3
f(x) -8 3 1 12
Divided difference table

-1 -8
38
 11
0 1
0 3 1 11
 4
1 3 2 1
 1 44
20 2
2 1
11  1 3 1
4
12  1 30
 11
3 12 3 2

If f x   , find f a , b and f a , b , c by using divided differences.


1
1.
x2
[M/J07]
Divided difference table

a 1
a2 
a  b 
a2 b2
1 ab  bc  ca 
b
b2

b  c  a2 b2 c2
b2 c2
1
c
c2

2. Obtain a divided difference table for the following data: [A/M08]

x 5 7 11 13 17
y 150 392 1452 2366 5202

Divided difference table

5 150
121
7 392 24
265 1
11 1452 32 0
457 1
13 2366 42
709
17 5202

Page 20 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

3. Form the divided difference table for [N/D08]

x -1 1 2 4
y -1 5 23 119

Divided difference table

-1 -1
3
1 5 5
18 1
2 23 10
48
4 119

4. Find the divided differences of f x   x 3  x  2 for the arguments 1, 3, 6, 11.


[A/M10,A/M11]
Given f x   x  x  2
3

For x  1, 3 , 6 ,11 , f x  4 , 32 , 224 , 1344


Divided difference table

1 4
14
3 32 10
64 1
6 224 20
224
11 1344

5. Write the Newton’s divided difference formula. [N/D10]


y  y 0  x  x0  y 0  x  x0 x  x1   y 0  x  x0 x  x1 x  x 2   y 0  ..........
2 3

6. Obtain the Newton’s divided difference table for the following data [A/M11]

x 1 2 4 6
y -26 12 256 844
Divided difference table
1 -26
38
2 12 28
122 3
4 256 43
294
6 844

7. Form the divided difference table for the data  0 , 1 ,  1 , 4  ,  3 , 40 


and
 4 , 85  . [A/M 10,N/D15]

Page 21 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Divided difference table


0 1
3
1 4 5
18 1
3 40 9
45
4 85
8. Find the first and second divided differences with arguments a , b , c of the
function f  x   .
1
[N/D10,M/J14]
x
Divided difference table

a 1
a 1

ab
b 1 1
b 1 abc

c bc
1
c

1 1
9. Show that 3  a   
bcd abcd
. [A/M15,N/D15]

Let f a  
1
a
 1   1   a  b 
  
f b   f a   b   a   a b  b  a    1
Then f a , b     
ba ba ba a b b  a  ab

 1   1   a  c
      
f b , c   f a , b   b c   a b   a b c   c  a   1
f a , b , c    
ca ca ca a b c c  a  a b c

 1   1  a d
    
f b , c , d   f a , b , c   b c d   a b c   a b c d    d  a    1
f a , b , c , d    
d a d a d a a b c d d  a  abcd

Page 22 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

10. Construct the divided difference table for the following data [M/J12]

x 0 1 2 5
f(x ) 2 3 12 147
Divided difference table
0 2
1
1 3 4
9 1
2 12 9
45
5 147
11. Find the divided differences of f x   x 3  x 2  3 x  8 for the arguments 0 , 1 , 4 , 5 .
[N/D13]
For the arguments of x  0 , 1 , 4 , 5 , we have y  f x  8 , 11 , 68 , 123
Divided difference table
0 8
11  8
3
1 0
1 11 19  3
4
68  11 40
 19 94
4 1 1
4 68 50
55  19
9
123  68 5 1
123  55
54
5

12. Find the second degree polynomial through the point 0 , 2 , 2 ,1 , 1, 0 using
Lagrange’s formula. [N/D14]

By Lagrange’s formula,
y
x  x1 x  x2  y  x  x0 x  x2  y  x  x0 x  x1 
y2
x0  x1 x0  x2  0 x1  x0 x1  x2  1 x2  x0 x2  x1 
y
x  2x  1 2  x  0x  1 1  x  0x  2 0
0  20  1 2  02  1 1  01  2
 x 2  3 x  2  x 2  x   x 2  3 x  2  x 2  x    
1 1 1 1
2 x2  4 x  2
2 2 2 2
y  x  2 x 1 .
2

13. Using Lagrange’s interpolation, find the polynomial through  0 , 0 , 1 , 1 


and  2 , 2  . [M/J 07]

Lagrange’s formula :

x  x1 x  x2  x  x0 x  x2  x  x0 x  x1 


y y0  y1  y2
x0  x1 x0  x2  x1  x0 x1  x2  x2  x0 x2  x1 
x x  2
y0 1  x x 1 2Page
 23xof. 238
1 1 21
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

14. Using Lagrange’s formula, find the polynomial to the given data. [M/J13]
X : 0 1 3
Y : 5 6 50

x  x1 x  x2  x  x0 x  x2  x  x0 x  x1 


y y0  y1  y2
x0  x1 x0  x2  x1  x0 x1  x2  x2  x0 x2  x1 
1
y  47 x 2  41 x  30 
6
15. Given y  f  x  is the exact curve and y  Pn  x  is the interpolating
polynomial curve, write the error in polynomial interpolation for any x where
x 0  x  x n and x 0  c  x n . [M/J12]

u u 1u  2 .......... u  r  r  1 x  x0
Error 
r  1!
 y x  c where u 
h
16. State Lagrange’s interpolation formula for unequal intervals. [N/D11]
( x  x1 )( x  x 2 )( x  x3 ).......( x  x n )
y  f ( x)  y0
( x0  x1 )( x0  x 2 )( x0  x3 ).......( x0  x n )
( x  x0 )( x  x 2 )( x  x3 ).......( x  x n )
 y1
( x1  x0 )( x1  x 2 )( x1  x3 ).......( x1  x n )
( x  x0 )( x  x1 )( x  x3 ).......( x  x n )
 y2
( x 2  x0 )( x 2  x1 )( x 2  x3 ).......(x 2  x n )
+……………………………….+
( x  x0 )( x  x1 )( x  x 2 )( x  x3 ).......( x  x n1 )
 yn
( x n  x0 )( x n  x1 )( x n  x 2 )( x n  x3 ).......( x n  x n1 )
17. Distinguish between Newton’s divided difference interpolation and Lagrange’s
interpolation. [A/M15]
Lagrange’s Interpolation formula can be used for equal and unequal intervals. But
Newton’s divided difference formula can be used only for unequal intervals.
Lagrangian method involves more arithmetic operations than does the divided
difference method.
18. Define a cubic spline S  x  which is commonly used for interpolation.
[A/M10,N/D12,M/J14]

     
xi  x 3 M i 1  x  xi 1 3 M i  xi  x  yi 1  h M i 1 
2
S x  
1
6h h  6 

x  xi  1  h2 
  i
y  Mi  .
h  6 
19. For cubic splines, what are the ( n – 1 ) conditions required to evaluate the
unknowns. [M/J12,N/D15]
M i  1  4 M i  M i  1  2  y i  1  2 y i  y i  1 , where i 1, 2 , 3, .........., n 1 .
6
h

Page 24 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

20. What are the advantages of cubic spline fitting. [A/M15]


Cubic spline provide better approximation to the behaviour of functions that have
abrupt local changes. Further splines perform better than higher order polynomial
approximation.
PART-B
1.Given the following table, find the number of students whose weight is between 60 and
70 lbs: [A/M10]

Weight(in lbs) x 0-40 40-60 60-80 80-100 100-120


No. of students 250 120 100 70 50
2.Find the value of tan 45 15 by using Newton’s forward difference interpolation

formula for [N/D10]

x 45 46 47 48 49 50
tan x  1.00000 1.03553 1.07237 1.11061 1.15037 1.19175

3.The population of a town is as follows:

x year 1941 1951 1961 1971 1981 1991


y population in
20 24 29 36 46 51
thousands
Estimate the population increase during the period 1946 to 1976. [N/D11]
4.Find the value of y when x  5 using Newton’s interpolation formula from the
following table: [N/D12]
x 4 6 8 10
y 1 3 8 16
5.The table gives the distance in nautical miles of the visible horizon for the given heights
in feet above the earth’s surface [A/M15]
x=height 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
y=distance 10.63 13.03 15.04 16.81 18.42 19.9 21.27
Find the values of y when x  218 ft using Newton’s forward interpolation formula.
6.From the following table, estimate the number of students who obtained marks between
40 and 45 [ A/M 10 ,N/D 11 ]

Marks 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80


No. of students 31 42 51 35 31
7.Find the value of y at x  21 and x  28 from the following data, using Newton’s
8.interpolation formula: [ N/D 10 , M/J 12 ]
x 20 23 26 29
y 0.3420 0.3907 0.4384 0.4848
9.From the following data, find  at x  43 and x  84

x 40 50 60 70 80 90
 184 204 226 250 276 304
Also express  in terms of x . [A/M15]

Page 25 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

10. Using Newton’s forward interpolation formula, find the cubic polynomial which takes
the following values: [N/D14,N/D15]

x 0 1 2 3
f x  1 2 1 10

11. From the following table find f x  and hence f 6 using Newton’s interpolation
formula [M/J12]

x 1 2 7 8
f x  1 5 5 4
12. For the following data prepare the finite difference table and express y as a function
of x using Newton’s backward difference formula and hence find y when x  3.5
[A/M11]
x 0 1 2 3 4
y 7 10 13 22 43
13. From the following data, find  at x  84

x 40 50 60 70 80 90
 184 204 226 250 276 304
Also express  in terms of x . [M/J12,N/D15]

14. Estimate sin 38  from the data given below: [A/M15]


x 0 10  20  30  40 
sin x 0 0.17365 0.34202 0.5 0.64279
Derive Newton’s backward difference formula by using operator method. [M/J12]
15. The following table gives the values of density of saturated water for various
temperatures of saturated steam.

Temperature  C 100 150 200 250 300


Density hg/m 3 958 917 865 799 712

Find by interpolation, the density when the temperature is 275 . [N/D13]


16. Find the function f x  from the following table using Newton’s divided difference
formula [A/M10]

x 0 1 2 4 5 7
f(x) 0 0 -12 0 600 7308
17. Given the tables
x 5 7 11 13 17
f(x) 150 392 1452 2366 5202
Evaluate f 9 using Newton’s divided difference formula. [A/M11]
18. Determine f x  as a polynomial in x for the following data, using Newton’s
divided difference formulae. Also find f 2 . [N/D11]

x -4 -1 0 2 5
f(x) 1245 33 5 9 1335

Page 26 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

19. Using Newton’s divided difference formula, find f x  from the following data
and hence find f 4 .
[N/D12]

x 0 1 2 5
f(x) 2 3 12 147

1. Find f 8 by using Newton’s divided difference formula [A/M10,N/D14]

x 4 5 7 10 11 13
f(x) 48 100 294 900 1210 2028
2. Find the value of f 6 for the data f 1  1, f 2  5 , f 7  5 and f 8  4 by using
Newton’s divided difference formula. [N/D11]
3. Find f 3 by Newton’s divided difference formula for the following data: [M/J14]
x -4 -1 0 2 5
y 1245 33 5 9 1335
4. Using Newton’s divided difference formula find f 3 from the data: [N/D15]
x 0 1 2 4 5
f x  1 14 15 5 6

5. Use Lagrange’s formula to find a polynomial which takes the values f 0  12 ,
f 1  0 , f 3  6 and f 4  12 . Hence find f 2 . [A/M10]
6. Use Lagrange’s interpolation formula to fit a polynomial to the given data f 1   8 ,
f 0  3 , f 2  1and f 3  2 . Hence find the value of f 1 . [N/D10]
7. Find the expression of f x  using Lagrange’s formula for the following data : [A/M11]

x 0 1 4 5
f(x) 4 3 24 39
8. Find the value of x when y  20 using Lagrange’s formula from the following table
[A/M11]
x 1 2 3 4
y=f(x) 1 8 27 64
9. Using Lagrange’s interpolation, calculate the profit in the year 2000 from the following
data: [M/J12,N/D15]
year 1997 1999 2001 2002
Profit in lakhs of
43 65 159 248
Rs.
10. Use Lagrange’s method to find log 10 656 , given that log 10 654  2.8156 ,
log 10 658  2.8182 , log 10 659  2.8189 and log 10 661  2.8202 . [N/D12]
11. Using Lagrange’s formula for interpolation find y9.5 given: [N/D10,M/J12]

x 7 8 9 10
y 3 1 1 9

Page 27 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Find Lagrangian interpolating polynomial for the following data:

x 1 2 3 5
f(x) 0 7 26 124
Hence find f 4 . [A/M11]
12. Find the polynomial f x  by using Lagrange’s formula and hence find f 3 for the
following values of x and y: [N/D11,N/D14

x 0 1 2 5
f(x) 2 3 12 147

13. Apply Lagrange’s formula to find y ( 27 ) to the data given below .


x : 14 17 31 35
y : 68.8 64 44 39.1 [ M / J 13 ]
14. Use Lagrange’s formula to find the value of y at x  26 from the following data:
x: 3 7 9 10
y : 168 120 72 63 [N/D13]

15. Using Lagrange’s interpolation formula, find y2 from the following data:
y0  0 ; y1 1; y3  81; y4  256 ; y5  625 [M/J14]

16. Using Lagrange’s interpolation find the interpolated value for x  3 of the table.
[A/M15]
x 3.2 2.7 1.0 4.8
f x  22.0 17.8 14.2 38.3

17. Fit a Lagrange polynomial to the data:


x 1 2 3 5
y 0 1 26 124
and hence find y when x  3.5 [A/M15]
18. Find the Lagrange polynomial f x  satisfying the following data :
x : 1 3 5 7
y  f x  : 24 120 336 720
and hence find f 4 . [N/D15]

19. If f 0  1 , f 1  2 , f 2  33 and f 3  244 , find a cubic spline approximation,
assuming M 0  M 3  0 . Also find f 2.5 . [A/M10]
20. Find the natural cubic spline approximation for the function f x  defined by the
following data:

x 0 1 2 3
f(x) 1 2 33 244
Hence find the value of f 2.5 and f 2.5 . [N/D10]
21. Find the cubic spline approximation for the function y  f x  from the following data,
 
given that y0  y3  0 . [A/M11]
22.
Page 28 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

x -1 0 1 2
f(x) -1 1 3 35
23. Find the cubic polynomial which takes the following values: [M/J12]

x 0 1 2 3
f(x) 1 2 1 10

x 1 2 3 4
y 1 2 5 11
Find the cubic splines and evaluate y 1.5 and y 3 . [M/J12,A/M15,N/D15]

24. Obtain the cubic spline for the following data to find y 0.5 [N/D12]
x -1 0 1 2
y -1 1 3 35
25. Fit the cubic spline for the data [A/M10]
x 0 1 3
f 1 0 2
26. Fit the cubic spline for the following table of values: [N/D11]
x 1 2 3
f(x) -6 -1 16
27. Find the natural cubic spline to fit the data:
x 0 1 2
f(x) -1 3 29
Hence find f 0.5 and f 1.5 [N/D13]
28. Fit the cubic splines for the following data: [M/J14]
x: 1 2 3 4 5
y: 1 0 1 0 1
29. Obtain the cubic spline approximation for the function y  f x  from the following
 
data, given that y0  y3  0

x -1 0 1 2
y -1 1 3 35
30. From the following table :
x : 1 2 3
y : -8 -1 18
Compute y1.5 and y1 , using cubic spline. [N/D15]

UNIT-III : Numerical Differentiation and integration


PART-A
dy d2y
1. Write down the expressions for and at x  x 0 by Newton’s forward
dx dx 2
difference formula. [M/J06]
 dy  1  1 1 1 
    y 0  2 y 0  3 y 0  4 y 0  ............
 dx  x  x0 h  2 3 4 
d2y 1  2 11 4 
 2   2  y 0   y 0  12  y 0  ...............
3

 dx  x  x0 h

Page 29 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

dy d2y
2. Write down the expressions for and at x  x n by Newton’s backward
dx dx 2
difference formula. [N/D06,N/D10,A/M11,M/J14]
 dy  1  1 1 1 
    y n   2 y n   3 y n   4 y n  ............
 dx  x  xn h  2 3 4 
d2y 1  11 4 
 2   2  2 y n   3 y n   y n  ...............
 dx  x  xn h  12 
3. What is the order of the error in trapezoidal rule? [M/J08]
The order of the error in Trapezoidal rule is h 2 .
rd
1
4. State the local error term in Simpson’s rule. [N/D14]
3

The local error term in Simpson’s


1
rule is E 

rd
b  ah 4
M where M is in the
3 180
interval a , b  .
5. Write the errors in Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules of numerical integration?
[A/M15]
The error in Trapezoidal rule is E 
b  a  h M where M is in the interval a , b .
2

12

The error in Simpson’s


1
rd
rule is E 
b  ah 4
M where M is in the interval a , b  .
3 180

6. Evaluate  sin x dx by Trapezoidal rule by dividing ten equal parts. [M/J13]
0
ba  0 
Here n  10 , y  f x  sin x and h   
n 10 10

  3 2  3 7 4 9
x 
0 10 5 10 5 2 5 10 5 10

y
0 0.309 0.5878 0.809 0.9511 1 0.9511 0.809 0.5878 0.309 0

By Trapezoidal rule,

0 sin x dx  2  y0  y10   2  y1  y2  y3  y4  y5  y6  y7  y8  y9 
h

 
 
   0  0  2 0.309  0.5878  0.809  0.9511  1  0.9511  0.809  0.5878  0.309
10
2

 sin x dx  1.9835
0
2
dx
7. Taking h  0.5 , evaluate  1 x
1
2
using Trapezoidal rule. [M/J14]

Page 30 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Given h  0.5 , y  f x  
1
1 x 2
x 1 1.5 2

1
y 0.5 0.3077 0.2
1 x2

By Trapezoidal rule, we have


2

 1 x
dx
2

h
 y 0  y 2   2 y1   0.5 0.5  0.2  2 0.3077   0.32885
1
2 2

6
dx
8. Evaluate  1 x
0
2
using Trapezoidal rule. [N/D13]

ba 6 0
 1 , y  f x  
1
Let n  6 , then h  
n 6 1 x 2
x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

1
y 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.0588 0.0385 0.027
1 x2

By Trapezoidal rule, we have


2

 1 x
dx
2

h
 y0  y6   2  y1  y 2  y3  y 4  y5 
1
2
2

 1 x
dx
2

1
1  0.027   2 0.5  0.2  0.1  0.0588  0.0385  1.4108 .
1
2
1
dx
9. Evaluate  1 x
0
using Trapezoidal rule. [N/D10]

ba 1
Let n  4 h    0.25
n 4

x
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1
1
y 1 0.8 0.66 0.57 0.5
1 x
By Trapezoidal rule
I   y 0  y 4   2  y1  y 2  y 3 
h
2
I 
0.25 1  0.5  2 0.8  0.66  0.57   0.695 .
2
10. Write down the Newton-cote’s formula for equidistant ordinates. [A/M11]
xn
 n2 1  n3 n2  2 1  n4  
x f  x  dx  h  0
n y   y 0  
  
  y 0    n 3  n 2  3 y 0  ...............
0  2 2 3 2  6 4  

Page 31 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

1
dx
11. Evaluate  1 x
0
2
using Trapezoidal rule. [N/D12]

ba 1
Let n  4 h    0.25
n 4
x 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1
1
y 1 0.94 0.8 0.64 0.5
1 x 2
By Trapezoidal rule
I   y 0  y 4   2  y1  y 2  y 3 
h
2
I 
0.25
1  0.5  2 0.94  0.8  0.64  0.7825 .
2
1
1
12. Evaluate  x dx by Trapezoidal rule, dividing the range into 4 equal parts.[N/D15]
1
2

1
1  
ba  2   0.125
Let n  4 h  
n 4

x 0.5 0.625 0.75 0.875 1


1
y 2 1.6 1.3333 1.1429 1
x
By Trapezoidal rule,
I   y 0  y 4   2  y1  y 2  y 3 
h
2
I 
0.125
2  1  2 1.6  1.3333  1.1429  0.697 .
2
13. Compare Trapezoidal rule and Simpson’s 1/3 rule for evaluating numerical
integration. [N/D07]
i) In Newton Cotes Quadrature formula, if we put n = 1 we get Trapezoidal rule
whereas if we put n = 2, we get Simpson’s 1/3rd rule.
ii) In Trapezoidal rule, the interpolating polynomial is linear whereas in Simpson’s
1/3rd rule, the interpolating polynomial is of degree 2.
iii) In Trapezoidal rule, there is no restriction on the number of intervals whereas in
Simpson’s 1/3rd rule, the number of intervals should be even.
14. What approximation is used in deriving Simpson’s rule of integration? [N/D10]
h 4 is the approximation used in deriving Simpson’s rule of integration.
15. Give the order of error in the Simpson’s 1/3 rd rule. [M/J12]
The order of error in the Simpson’s 1/3 rd rule is h . 4

16. When do you apply Simpson’s 1/3 rd rule, and what is the order of the error in
Simpson’s 1/3 rule. [A/M11]

Page 32 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

The number of subintervals n should be even and order of error is h 4 .


17. State Simpson’s one-third rule. [N/D11,M/J13]
Simpson’s one-third rule is given by
x x0 x1 x2 ……………………….. xn
y y0 y1 y2 ……………………….. yn

I 
h
 y0  y n   2  y0  y 2  .......  4  y1  y3  .........
3
4
18. Evaluate  f  x  dx from the table by Simpson’s 3/8 rule
1
[M/J06]

x 1 2 3 4
f(x ) 1 8 27 64
Here n  3

I 
3h
 y0  y3   2 0  3  y1  y 2 
8
I  1  64  3 8  27  
3 255
 63.75 .
8 4
19. State the formula of Simpson’s 3/8 th rule. [M/J07]
Simpson’s 3/8 th rule is given by
x x0 x1 x2 ……………………….. xn
y y0 y1 y2 ……………………….. yn

I 
3h
 y0  y n   2  y3  y6  .......  3  y1  y 2  y 4  y5  .........
8

20. Write Simpson’s 1/3 rd and 3/8 th formulae. [N/D09]


Simpson’s one-third rule is given by
x x0 x1 x2 ……………………….. xn
y y0 y1 y2 ……………………….. yn
h
I  y0  y n   2  y0  y 2  .......  4  y1  y3  .........
3
Simpson’s 3/8 th rule is given by
x x0 x1 x2 ……………………….. xn
y y0 y1 y2 ……………………….. yn
3h
I   y0  y n   2  y3  y6  .......  3  y1  y 2  y 4  y5  .........
8
21. Under what condition , Simpson’s 3/8 rule can be applied and state the formula.
[M/J12,N/D15]
The number of subintervals n should be a multiple of 3 .

22. State the Romberg’s integration formula with h1 and h2 . Further, obtain the
h
formula when h1  h and h2  . [A/M10]
2

Page 33 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

 I h  Ih 
 h  
I  h ,   Ih   2 
 2 2  3 
 
1
dx
23. Use two-point Gaussian quadrature formula to solve  1 x
1
2
. [A/M10,M/J12]

 1   1 
1 1
dx dt
11 x 2  11 t 2  f  3   f   3  where f t   1  t 2
1

 0.75  0.75  1.5


2

 e dx by two point Gaussian quadrature formula. [N/D10,N/D15]


x 2
24. Evaluate
0

 ab   ba  ba 


Let x    t , dx    dt
 2   2   2 
x  1 t , dx  dt
1
I   e  1  t  dt
2

1

Let f t   e  1 t 
2

Gaussian two point quadrature formula is given by


 1   1 
I  f    f     0.0831  0.8364  0.9195
 3  3
  t   
1

4 
25. Using two point Gaussian quadrature formula evaluate I  sin   dt .
1
4 
[A/M15]

Here f t   sin t  1
4
By two point Gaussian quadrature formula, we have

 1
 t       1   1 
4 
I  sin   dt   f     f  
1
4  4   3  3 
  1   1 
 sin    1  sin   1
4 4 3  4  3 

I  0.9454  0.3259  0.9985 .
4
2 x

26. Evaluate e
2
2
dx by Gauss two point formula. [N/D13]

Here a   2 and b  2

 ab   b  a  b  a
Let x    t dx    dt
 2   2   2 

x  2 t and dx  2 dt
Page 34 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

2 x 1 1

e
2
2
dx   e  t 2 dt  2  e  t dt
1 1

Here f t   e  t
By Gaussian two point formula, we have
2

x 1
  1   1 
e
2
2
dx  2  e  t dt  2  f  
1   3
  f 
  3


  1 1

 2 e 3
e 3
  2 0.5614  1.7813  4.6854
 

27. Write down two point Gaussian quadrature formula. [A/M 11]
   ba 
Change the interval a , b  into  1 , 1  by using x
a b
 t ,
 2   2 
ba 
dx    dt
 2 

Gaussian two point quadrature formula is


 1   1 
1
I   f t  dt  f     f   .
1  3  3

28. Write down the three point Gaussian quadrature formula to evaluate
1

 f  x  dx .
1
[N/D12,A/M15]

b 1

 f x  dx   f t  dt where the interval a , b is changed into  1 , 1 by the


a 1

 ab   ba 
transformation x    t
 2   2 
1
Then  f t  dt  A f t   A f t   A f t 
1
1 1 2 2 3 3 where A1  A3  0.5555 ,

A2  0.8888 and t1   0.7745 , t 2  0 , t 3  0.7745

1
29. State two point Gaussian quadrature formula to evaluate  f  x  dx .
1

[N/D06,N/D07,N/D15]

 1   1 
Gaussian two point quadrature formula is I  f     f   .
 3  3

1
1
30. Evaluate  1 x
1
4
dx using Gaussian quadrature with two points. [N/D08]

Page 35 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC
Let f x  
1
1 x 4

Gaussian two point formula is

 1   1 
I  f     f    0.9  0.9  1.8 .
 3  3

PART-B

1. From the following table of values of x and y , obtain y x  and y x  for x  16
[N/D10]

x 15 17 19 21 23 25
y 3.873 4.123 4.359 4.583 4.796 5

2. Find the first two derivatives of x 3 at x  50 and x  56 , for the given table: [N/D11]
1

x 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
y  x 
1
3 3.6840 3.7084 3.7325 3.7563 3.7798 3.8030 3.8259

3. A slider in a machine moves along a fixed straight rod. Its distance x cm along the rod is
given below for various values of the time 't ' seconds. Find the velocity of the slider
when t  1.1 second. [M/J12]

t 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6


x 7.989 8.403 8.781 9.129 9.451 9.750 10.031

4. Find f x  at x  1.5 and x  4.0 from the following data using Newton’s formulae for
differentiation [N/D12]

x 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0


y=f(x) 3.375 7.0 13.625 24.0 38.875 59.0

5. Find the value of sec 31 from the following data [N/D11,A/M15]

 31 32 33 34
tan  0.6008 0.6249 0.6494 0.6745

6. The population of a certain town is given below. Find the rate of growth of the population
in 1931 [ M/J 12 ]

Year x 1931 1941 1951 1961 1971


Population in thousand
40.62 60.80 79.95 103.56 132.65
y

Page 36 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

7. For the given data, find the first two derivatives at x  1.1 [M/J14,A/M15]

x 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6


y 7.989 8.403 8.781 9.129 9.451 9.750 10.031

8. Find the first and second order derivatives of f x  at x  1.5 for the following data:
[N/D13]

x 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0


f x  3.375 7.000 13.625 24.000 38.875 59.000

9. Given the following data, find y 6 and the maximum value of y (if it exists) [A/M10]

x 0 2 3 4 7 9
y 4 26 58 112 466 922

10. Find the first derivative of f x  at x  2 for the data f 1   21, f 1 15 , f 2 12
and f 3  3 using Newton’s divided difference formula. [N/D10]

11. Find f 10 from the following data [A/M11,N/D15]

x 3 5 11 27 34
f(x) -13 23 899 17315 35606

12. Find the values f 8 and f 9 from the following table, using divided difference
interpolation formula: [A/M11]

x 4 5 7 10 11
f(x) 48 100 294 900 1210

13. Find f 3 and f 3 for the following data : [N/D15]
x : 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
f x  : - 14 -10.032 -5.296 - 0.256 6.672 14
1
dx 1 1 1
14. Find the approximate value of I   1 x
0
using Trapezoidal rule with h  , , and
2 4 8
then by Romberg’s method. [A/M11]

6
1
15. Evaluate I   1 x dx using Trapezoidal rule and check by direct integration. [M/J12]
0


16. By dividing the range into ten equal parts evaluate  sin x dx
0
by Trapezoidal and

Simpson’s one-third rule. [N/D10]

Page 37 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

6
ex
17. Evaluate I  0 1 x dx using Simpson’s 1/3 rule with h  1.
rd
[N/D11]

18. The velocity v (km/min) of a moped which starts from rest, is given at fixed intervals of
time t (min) as follows:
x : 0 2 4 6 8 10 12
y : 0 10 18 25 29 32 20
(i) Estimate approximately the distance covered in 12 minutes, by Simpson’s 1/3rd rule.
(ii) Estimate the acceleration at t  2 seconds. [ A/M15]
19. The velocities of a car running on a straight road at intervals of 2 minutes are given
below:
Time (min) : 0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Velocity (km/hr) : 0 22 30 27 18 7 0
1
Using Simpson’s - rd rule find the distance covered by the car. [N/D13]
3

20. The velocity v of a particle at a distance s from a point on its path is given by the table
below:
s(meter) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
v(m/sec) 47 58 64 65 61 52 38

Estimate the time taken to travel 60 meters by Simpson’s 1/3 rd rule and
Simpson’s 3/8 th rule. [A/M10,N/D14]

6
1
21. Evaluate I   1 x dx by using (i) direct integration (ii) Trapezoidal rule (iii) Simpson’s
0
one-third rule (iv) Simpson’s three-eighth rule. [N/D11]


2
22. Compute  sin x dx using Simpson’s 3/8 rule. [N/D12]
0
1 .3
23. Taking h  0.05 , evaluate 
1
x dx using Trapezoidal rule and Simpson’s three-eighth

rule. [M/J14]

1
1
24. Use Romberg’s integration to evaluate  1 x
0
2
dx . [A/M10]

1
1
25. Using Romberg’s rule evaluate  1 x dx correct
0
to three decimal places by taking

h  0.5 , 0.25 and 0.125 . [N/D10,A/M15]

1
1
26. Evaluate  1 x
0
2
dx using Romberg’s method. [A/M11]

Page 38 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

1
2
x
27. Evaluate  sin x dx correct to three decimal places using Romberg’s method.
0
[M/J14]

1
dx
28. Evaluate  1  x and correct to 3 decimal places using Romberg’s method and hence find
0

the value of log e 2 . [N/D14,N/D15]

29. Use the Romberg’s method to get an improved estimate of the integral from x  1.8 to
x  3.4 from the data in table with h  0.4 [A/M15]

x : 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6


f x  : 4.953 6.050 7.389 9.025 11.023 13.464
x : 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8
f x  : 16.445 20.056 24.533 29.964 36.598 44.701

2
1
30. Evaluate  1 x
1
3
dx using Gauss three point formula. [A/M11,N/D14]

x2  2 x 1
2
31. Evaluate 
0 1   x 1 
2
dx by Gaussian three point formula. [M/J13,N/D15]

1
1
32. Evaluate I   1 t
1
2
dt by one-point, two-point and three-point Gaussian formula and

compare with the exact value. [A/M10]

3
dt
33. Apply Gaussian three point formula to evaluate  1 t .
2
[N/D10]

 3 x  5 x 4 dx .
1
2
34. Using Gaussian three-point formula evaluate [M/J12]
1
1
sin x
35. Apply three point Gaussian quadrature formula to evaluate 
0
x
dx [N/D13]

1.5

e
 x2
36. Evaluate dx using three point Gaussian quadrature formula. [A/M15]
0.2

1
1
37. Use Romberg’s method to compute  1 x
0
2
dx correct to 4 decimal places. Also evaluate

the same integral using three-point Gaussian quadrature formula. Comment on the

obtained values by comparing with the exact value of the integral which is equal to .
4
[M/J12,N/D15]

Page 39 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

1 . 2 1 .4
dx dy
38. Evaluate   x y
1 1
by trapezoidal formula by taking h  k  0.1 . [A/M10]

4 1
5

39. Evaluate 1 1 x  y dx dy by trapezoidal rule in x -direction with h  1 and Simpson’s
one-third rule in y -direction with k  1 . [N/D10

1 1
1
40. Evaluate   x  y 1 dx dy by using Trapezoidal rule taking h  0.5 and k  0.25 .
0 0
[A/M11,N/D14,N/D15]

2 2
dx dy
41. Using Trapezoidal rule, evaluate  x
1 1
2
 y2
numerically with h  0.2 along x -direction

and k  0.25 along y -direction. [M/J12]

2 4
1
42. Evaluate   x  y 
1 3
2
dx dy by taking h  k  0.5 using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rule.

[N/D10,N/D15]
3 2

 e dx dy by Trapezoidal rule with  x  0.5 and Simpson’s one-third rule


x2 y
43. Evaluate
1 0
with  y  0.5 . [N/D11]
2 .4 4 .4
44. Evaluate   x y dx dy
2 4
by Trapezoidal rule taking h  k  0.1 [N/D13]
2.6 4.4
1
45. Apply Simpson’s rule to evaluate the integral I   xy
2 4
dx dy . [A/M10]

dx dy
46. Numerically evaluate   1 x2
y 2
by taking  x   y  0.25 using Simpson’s 1/3rd

rule. [A/M11]
2 1
1 1
47. Evaluate   4 x y dx dy using Simpson’s rule by taking h  4
0 0
and k  .
2
[N/D12]

1 1

1 2 2
sin x y 
48. Taking h  k  , evaluate
4 
0 0
1 x y
dx dy using Simpson’s rule. [M/J14]

2 2
d xd y
49. Evaluate  x
1 1
2
 y2
with h  0.2 along x - direction and k  0.25 along y - direction.

[A/M15]

Page 40 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

UNIT-IV : Initial value problems


PART-A
1. Find y 0 from the following table [A/M15]
x : 0 1 2 3 4 5
y : 4 8 15 7 6 2
Difference table
x y y 0 2 y 0 3 y 0 4 y 0 5 y 0
0 4
4
1 8 3
7 -18
2 15 -15 40
-8 22 -72
3 7 7 -32
-1 -10
4 6 -3
-4
5 2

By Newton’s forward formula, we have


1  
y 0  y 0  2 y 0  3 y 0  4 y 0  5 y 0 
1 1 1 1
h  2 3 4 5 
 
y 0  4  2 3  3  18  4 40  5  72   27.9 .
1 1 1 1 1
1

2. By Taylor’s series method, find y 1.1 given y  x  y , y  1  0 .


[ N/D 06,M/J 09, A/M 10, A/M 11,M/J13]

Given x0  1 , y 0  0 , h  0.1
y  x  y y0  1
y   1  y  y 0  2
y   y  y 0  2

y1  y 0  h y 0 
h2
y 0 
h3
y 0  0  0.11 
0.1 2  0.1 2  0.1103 .
2 3

2! 3! 2 6

3. Write Taylor’s series formula to solve y   f  x , y  with y x 0   y 0 . [M/J07]

h2 h3
yn 1  y n  h y n  y n  y n  .....................
2! 3!

4. Find by Taylor’s series method, the value of y at x  0.1 from


 y 2  x , y 0 1 .
dy
[A/M15]
dx

Page 41 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Here x0  0 , y0  1 , h  0.1

Also given y   y 2  x y 0  y 0  x0  1  0  1
2

 
y   2 y y   1 y0  2 y0 y0 1  211 1  3
y   2 y y   2 y  2
 2
y 0  2 y 0 y 0  2 y 0  213  21  6  2  8
2

By Taylor’s series method, we have


 h  h 
2 3
y0.1  y 0  h y 0  y0  y 0  ..............
2! 3!

 1  0.11 
0.12 3  0.13 8  ......  1  0.1  0.005  0.0013  1.1063 .
2! 6
5. Find the Taylor series upto x term satisfying 2 y  y  x  1 , y0 1 . [N/D08]
3

Given x0  0 , y0  1 and let h  0.1

y   x  y  1
1
y 0  0
2
y   1  y 
1
y 0  0.5
2
y 
y    y 0   0.25
2

y1  y 0  h y 0 
h2
y 0 
h3
y 0  1  0.10 
 0.1
2
0.5  0.1
3
 0.25  1.0024 .
2! 3! 2 6
6. State the merits and demerits of Taylor’s series method of solution.
[A/M10,M/J14,N/D15]
Merits: (i) It is easily derived for any order according to own interest.
(ii) The values of y for any x are easily obtained.
Demerits: This method suffers from the time consumed in calculating the
higher derivatives.
7. What is the major drawback of Taylor series method? [M/J12]

If it is possible to find the successive derivatives in easy manner then only Taylor
series method is powerful.

8. State Euler’s Formula [M/J13]

Given y’ = f ( x ) , y ( x0 ) = y0
Formula: yn + 1 = yn + h f ( xn , yn )

9. Find y 0.1 if  1  y , y 0  1 using Taylor series method.


dy
[N/D12]
dx

Given x0  0 , y0  1 , h  0.1
y  1 y y 0  2
y   y  y 0  2
y   y  y 0  2

y1  y 0  h y 0 
h2
y 0 
h3
y 0  1  0.12 
0.1 2  0.1 2  1.1103 .
2 3

2! 3! 2 6

Page 42 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

10. Find y 1.1 , given  x  y , y 1  2 by Euler’s method.


dy
[M/J06,M/J13]
dx

Given x0  1 , y 0  2 , h  0.1 , y’ = x+y


Let f x , y   x  y , Hence f x0 , y0   x0  y0  3
Euler’s formula is y1  y0  h f x0 , y0 
y1  2  0.1 f 1, 2  2  0.1 3  2.3 .

11. Find y 1.1 , using Euler’s method from  x 2  y 2 , y 1  1 .


dy
[A/M08]
dx

Given x0  1 , y0  1 , h  0.1 , y   x 2  y 2
Let f x , y   x 2  y 2
f  x0 , y 0   x0  y 0  2
2 2

Euler’s formula is y1  y0  h f x0 , y0 


y1  1 0.12  1.2 .

12. Write down the modified Euler’s formula for ODE? [M/J09]

The modified Euler’s formula is


 
y n  1  y n  h f  x n  , y n  f x n , y n  .
h h
 2 2 
13. Find y 0.2 when y    2 x y , y0  1 and h  0.2 , by Euler’s method.
2

[N/D09]
Given x0  0 , y0  1 , h  0.2 , y    2 x y 2

Let f x , y    2 x y 2
f x0 , y0    2 x0 y0  0
2

Euler’s formula is y1  y0  h f x0 , y0 


y1  1 0.20  1 .

14. Using Euler’s method find y 0.2 given y   x  y , y 0  1 . [A/M10]

Given x0  0 , y0  1 , h  0.2 , y   x  y
Let f x , y   x  y
f  x0 , y 0   x0  y 0  1
Euler’s formula is y1  y0  h f x0 , y0 
y1  1 0.21  1.2 .
15. Given y   x  y , y0  1 by using Euler’s method find y 0.1 .
2
[A/M11]

Given x0  0 , y0  1 , h  0.1 , y   x 2  y
Let f x , y   x 2  y
f x0 , y0   x0  y0  1
2

Page 43 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Euler’s formula is y1  y0  h f x0 , y0 


y1  1 0.11  1.1 .

 1  y , y 0  0 using Euler’s method for x  0.1 with h  0.1 . [N/D11]


dy
16. Solve
dx

Given x0  0 , y 0  0 , h  0 .1 , y   1  y
Let f x , y   1  y
f  x0 , y 0   1 y0  1
Euler’s formula is y1  y0  h f x0 , y0 
y1  0  0.11  0.1 .

 f  x , y  with initial condition


dy
17. Give the modified Euler’s method to solve
dx
y x 0   y 0 . [M/J12]
Given y  f x , y  , yx0   y 0
Modified Euler’s formula is
 
y n  1  y n  h f  x n  , y n  f x n , y n  .
h h
 2 2 
18. Use Euler’s method to find y 0.2 and y 0.4 given  x  y , y 0  1 .
dy
dx
[A/M 10,A/M15]
Given x0  0 , y0  1 , h  0.2 , y   x  y
Let f x , y   x  y
f  x0 , y 0   x0  y 0  1
Euler’s formula is y1  y0  h f x0 , y0 
y1  1 0.21  1.2 .
Hence x1  0.2 , y1  1.2
f x1 , y1   x1  y1  1.4
y2  y1  h f x1 , y1   1.2  0.21.4  1.48
19. Find y 0.1 by using Euler’s method given that  x  y , y 0  1 .
dy
dx
[N/D10,N/D14,N/D15,N/D15]
Given x0  0 , y0  1 , h  0.1 , y   x  y
Let f x , y   x  y
f  x0 , y 0   x0  y 0  1
Euler’s formula is y1  y0  h f x0 , y0 
y1  1 0.11  1.1 .

20. Find y 0.2 for the equation y   y  e x , given that y0  1 by using Euler’s
method. [A/M11]

Given x0  0 , y0  1 , h  0.2 , y   y  e x
Let f x , y   y  e x
f x0 , y 0   y 0  e x0  2
Euler’s formula is y1  y0  h f x0 , y0 
y1  1 0.22Page
  144
.4 .of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

 f  x , y  with y x 0   y 0 .
dy
21. State Euler’s method to solve [N/D11]
dx
Given y  f x , y  , y  x0   y 0
y n  1  y n  h f xn , y n  .
22. Using Euler’s method find the solution of the initial value problem
y   y  x 2  1 , y0  0.5 at x  0.2 taking h  0.2 . [N/D13]
Here h  0.2 , x0  0 , y 0  0.5
y   f x , y   y  x 2  1
By Euler’s formula, we have
y1  yx1   y0.2  y0  h f x0 , y0   y0  h y0  x0 1  2

 
 0.5  0.2 0.5  0 2 1  0.8 .
23. Using Euler’s method, find the solution of the initial value problem
 log  x  y  , y0  2 at x  0.2 by assuming h  0.2 .
dy
[M/J12]
dx
Given x0  0 , y 0  2 , h  0.2 , y  log x  y 
Let f x , y   log x  y 
f x0 , y0   log x0  y0   log 2  0.3010
Euler’s formula is y1  y0  h f x0 , y0 
y1  2  0.20.3010  2.0602 .
24. State the advantages of RK-method over Taylor’s series method. [A/M15]
The RK-methods are designed to give greater accuracy and they possess the
advantage of requiring only the function values at some selected points on the sub
interval.

 f  x , y  with y x 0   y 0 .
dy
25. Write Runge-Kutta’s 4th order formula to solve
dx
[M/J07,N/D12]
Given y  f x , y  , yx0   y 0
Runge-Kutta’s 4th order formula is given by
k1  h f x0 , y0 
 h k 
k 2  h f  x0  , y 0  1 
 2 2
 h k 
k 3  h f  x0  , y 0  2 
 2 2
k 4  h f  x0  h , y 0  k 3 

Let  y  k1  2 k 2  2 k 3  k 4 
1
6
y1  y0   y0 .

Page 45 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

26. What is Predictor – Corrector method? [N/D07]

Predictor – corrector methods are methods which require the values of y at


xn , xn 1, xn  2 ,.......... for computing the values of y at x n 1 . We first use a formula
to find the value of y at x n 1 and this is known as a predictor formula. The value of y
so got is improved or corrected by another formula is known as corrector formula.

27. Mention the multistep methods available for solving ordinary differential
equation. [N/D07]
The multistep methods available for solving ordinary differential equation are
(i) Milne’s predictor-corrector method
(ii) Adam-Bashforth predictor-corrector method.
28. Write down the Milne’s predictor – corrector formula. [N/D10,M/J14,N/D14]
yn 1 , p  yn  3 
4h
3
 
2 y n  2  y n 1  2 y n

y n  1 , c  y n 1  h
3

y n  1  4 y n  y n  1
29. Define single step and multi step methods for the solution of the differential
 f  x , y  , y x 0   y 0 .
dy
equation [N/D11]
dx
In solving the differential equation y  f x , y  , if only one initial value
yx0   y 0 is given then it is called single step method.
If there are four initial values y0 , y1 , y 2 , y3 then it is called multi step meyhod.
30. Give the error for Milne’s predictor formula. [M/J12]
14h5 5
The truncation error in Milne’s predictor formula is y ( )
45
 h5 5
The truncation error in Milne’s corrector formula is y ( )
90
31. State Adams – Bashforth predictor and corrector formula.
[M/J 06,N/D 06,A/M 08,N/D 08,N/D 09,A/M 11,N/D13,N/D15]
y n 1 , p  yn 
h
24
 
55 y n  59 y n 1  37 y n  2  9 y n  3

yn 1 , c  yn 
h
24
 
9 y n  1  19 y n  5 y n 1  y n  2
32. Distinguish between single step methods and multi step methods. [A/M15]
In solving difference equation y  f x , y  , if only one initial value yx0   y 0 is
given then it is called single step method. If there are four initial values y 0 , y1 , y 2 , y3 ,
then it is called multistep method.

Page 46 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

PART-B

1.Use Taylor series method to find y 0.1 and y 0.2 given that
dy
 3e x  2 y ,
dx
y0  0 , correct to 4 decimal accuracy. [A/M10]

 x 2 y  1 , y0 1 , by Taylor’s series


dy
2.Find the value of y at x  0.1 , 0.2 given
dx
method up to four terms. [N/D10]

 x 2 y  1 , y0 1 .
dy
3.Using Taylor’s series method, find y at x  0 if [N/D14]
dx

y0 1 , and find y 1.1 and y 1.2 by Taylor’s series


dy
4.Solve  x  y given
dx
method. [N/D10]

5.Using Taylor’s series method, compute y 0.2 correct to 4 decimal places given
 1  x y and y0  0 .
dy
[A/M11]
dx

6.Using Taylor series method, find y 1.1 correct to four decimal places given
1
 x y 3 and y1 1.
dy
[M/J12]
dx
7.Obtain y by Taylor’s series method, given that y   x y  1 , y0 1 , for x  0.1 and
0.2 correct to four decimal places. [N/D13]
dy
8.Using Taylor’s series method, find y at x  1.1 by solving the equation  x2  y2 ;
dx
y1  2 . Carryout the computations upto fourth order derivative. [M/J14]
9.Solve y   x  y ; y0 1 by Taylor’s series method. Find the values of y at x  0.1 and
x  0.2 . [A/M15]
 1  x y with y0  2 . Find y0.1 , y0.2
dy
10. Using Taylor series method solve
dx
and y0.3. [N/D15]
11. Given y    y and y0 1 , determine the values of y at x  0.01 , 0.02 , 0.03 by
Euler’s method. [M/J12]
12. Using Modified Euler’s method find y 0.1 and y 0.2 given  x 2  y 2 , y0 1 .
dy
dx
[N/D10]
, y0 1 by modified Euler’s method to find y 0.1 with
dy 2x
13. Solve  y
dx y
h  0 .1 . [N/D11]
yx
14. Solve y '  , y  0   1 at x = 0.1 by taking h = 0.02 by using Euler’s method.
yx
[ M/J 13 ]

Page 47 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

15. Using Modified Euler’s method, find y 4.1 and y 4.2 if 5 x  y 2  2  0 ; y4 1
dy
dx
[N/D12]
16. Apply modified Euler’s method to find y0.2 and y0.4 given y   x 2  y 2 ,
y0 1 by taking h  0.2 . [N/D14]

dy y 2  x 2
17. Use Runge - Kutta method of fourth order to find y 0.2 , given  ,
dx y 2  x 2
y0 1 , taking h  0.2 . [A/M10]

dy y 2  x 2
18. Using R-K method of fourth order solve  2 with y0  1 at x  0.2 .
dx y  x2
[A/M15]

19. Find y 0.8 correct to 4 decimal places by using Runge-Kutta method of 4th order if
y   y  x 2 , y0.6 1.7379 . [A/M10]

20. Apply the fourth order Runge-Kutta method to find y 0.2 given that y   x 3  y ,
y0  2 . [A/M11]

21. Using Runge-Kutta method of fourth order,find the value of y at x  0.2 , 0.4 , 0.6
 x 3  y , y0  2 . Also find the value of y at x  0.8 using Milne’s
dy
given that
dx
predictor and corrector method. [M.J14]
22. Find y 0.3 , using Runge-Kutta method of fourth order, given that
dy 2x y
 1 ,
dx 1 x 2
y0  0 , y0.1  0.1006 , y0.2  0.2052 and then find the value of y 0.4 using
Milne predictor-corrector method. [A/M11]
2
d y dy dy
23. Solve 2
x  y  0 , given y  1 ,  0 at x  0 by the fourth order Runge-
dx dx dx
Kutta method to find y 0.1 with step size  0.1 . [N/D11]
24. Using Runge-Kutta method of fourth order, find y 0.7 correct to 3 decimal places if
y   y  x 2 , y0.6 1.7379 . [M/J12]
25. Find the value of y 0.1 by Runge-kutta method of fourth order given
y   x y   y  0 , y0 1 and y 0  0 . [N/D10,N/D11,N/D14]

26. Consider the second order initial value problem y   2 y   2 y  e 2 t sin t with
y0   0.4 and y0   0.6 using fourth order Runge kutta algorithm, find y 0.2 .
[M/J12]

27. Using Runge-Kutta method of order four, find y when x  1.2 in steps of 0.1 given
that y   x 2  y 2 and y1 1.5 [N/D13]

Page 48 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

28. Employ the classical fourth order Runge-Kutta method to integrate y   4 e 0.8 t  0.5 y
from t  0 to t  1 using a stepsize of 1 with y0  2 . [A/M15]
29. Find y0.8 given that y   y  x 2 , y0.6  1.7379 by using Runge-Kutta method
of order four. Take h  0.1 . [N/D15]

30. Solve for y 0.1 and z 0.1 from the simultaneous differential equations

 y  3 z ; y0  0 , z0  0.5 using Runge-kutta method of the


dy dz
 2 yz ;
dx dx
fourth order. [N/D12]
31. Use Milne’s predictor-corrector formula to find y 0.4 , given
dy


1 x 2 y 2,
dx 2
y0 1 , y0.1 1.06 , y0.2 1.12 and y0.3 1.21 . [A/M10]

 x y  y 2 , y0 1 , y0.1 1.1169 and y0.2 1.2774 , find (i) y 0.3 by


dy
32. Given
dx
Runge-kutta method of fourth order and (ii) y 0.4 by Milne’s method. [N/D10]

33. Using Runge-kutta method of fourth order, find y for x  0.1 , 0.2 , 0.3 given that
y   x y  y 2 , y0 1 . Continue the solution at x  0.4 using Milne’s method.
[A/M11]

34. Given that


dy 1
dx 2
 
 1  x 2 y 2 ; y0 1 , y0.1 1.06 , y0.2 1.12 and y0.3 1.21 ,

evaluate y 0.4 and y 0.5 by Milne’s predictor – corrector method. [N/D11]

35. Given that y   x y   y  0 , y0 1 , y 0  0 . Obtain y for x  0.1 , 0.2 and 0.3 by
Taylor’s series method and find the solution for y 0.4 by Milne’s method. [M/J12]

 1  y 2 ; y0.6  0.6841 , y0.4  0.4228 , y0.2  0.2027 , y0  0 ,


dy
36. Given that
dx
find y  0.2 using Milne’s method. [N/D12]

37. Determine the value of y 0.4 using Milne’s method given y   x y  y 2 , y0 1 .
Use Taylor’s series method to get the values of y 0.1 , y 0.2 and y 0.3 .
[A/M10,N/D15]

38. Using Milne’s method to find y 4.4 given 5 x  y 2  2  0 , with y4 1 ,


dy
dx
y4.1 1.0049 , y4.2 1.0097 , y4.3 1.0143 . [N/D10,N/D14,A/M15,N/D15]

39. Using Milne’s predictor-corrector method, find y 4.5 given 5 x y   y 2  2  0 ,


y4 1, y4.1 1.0049 , y4.2 1.0097 , y4.3 1.0143 and y4.4 1.0187 .
[N/D11]

Page 49 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

40. Use Milne’s method to find y0.8 , given y   , y0  2 , y0.2  2.0933 ,
1
x y
y0.4  2.1755 , y0.6  2.2493 . [N/D13]

 x y  y 2 and y0 1 , y0.1 1.1169 , y0.2 1.2773 , y0.3  0.2267 ,


dy
41. Given
dx
evaluate y0.4 by Milne’s predictor corrector method. [A/M15]

 x y  y 2 , y0 1 , y0.1 1.1169 , y0.2 1.2774 and y0.3 1.5041 .


dy
42. Given
dx
Use Adam’s method to estimate y 0.4 . [A/M10]

43. Solve y   x  y 2 , y0 1 to find y 0.4 by Adam’s method. Starting solutions


required are to be obtained using Taylor’s method using the value h  0.1 . [A/M11]

 x  y 2 , y0 1 to find y0.4 by Adam’s


dy
44. Solve the initial value problem
dx
Bashforth predictor corrector method and for starting solutions, use the information
Below y0.1  0.9117 , y0.2  0.8494 . Compute y0.3 using Runge Kutta
method of fourth order. [A/M15]

45. Obtain y 0.6 given y   x  y , y0 1 with h  0.2 by Adam’s method. [A/M10]

46. Using Adam-Basforth predictor-corrector method, find y 4.5 given


5 x y   y 2  2  0 , y4 1, y4.1 1.0049 , y4.2 1.0097 , y4.3 1.0143 and
y4.4 1.0187 . [N/D11]

y 0.4   x y , y0 1 , y0.1 1.01, y0.21.022 ,


dy 1
47. Find given
dx 2
y0.3 1.023 by Adam’s method. [M/J12]

48. Using Adam’s Bashforth method, find y4.4 given that 5 x y   y 2  2 , y4 1 ,
y4.1 1.0049 , y4.2 1.0097 and y4.3 1.0143 . [M/J14]

 x 2 1  y  , y1  1 , y1.1  1.233 , y1.2  1.548 , y1.3  1.979 ,


dy
49. Given
dx
evaluate y1.4 by Adam’s-Bashforth method. [A/M15,N/D15]

50. Find y0.1 , y0.2 and y0.3 from y  x  y 2 , y0  1 by using Runge-Kutta
method of Fourth order and then find y0.4 by Adam’s method. [N/D15]

Page 50 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

UNIT-V : Boundary value problems


PART-A

1. Define Boundary value problem. [N/D10]

If the conditions are prescribed at two or more points, then the problem is called as
boundary value problem.

2. Classify the partial differential equation u xx  2 u xy  4u yy  0 ; x , y  0 . [A/M11]


Given A  1 , B  2 , C  4
B 2  4 A C  4  4 4  12  0
Therefore, the given pde is elliptic.

3. Classify the partial differential equation u xx  x u yy  0 . [N/D11]


Given A  1 , B  0 , C   x
B 2  4 AC  0  4 x  4 x
B 2  4 A C  0 when x  0 , implies parabolic.
B 2  4 A C  0 when x  0 , implies elliptic.
B 2  4 A C  0 when x  0 ,implies hyperbolic.

4. Classify the differential equation f xx  2 f xy  f yy  0 . [A/M10]


Given A  1 , B   2 , C  1
B 2  4 AC  4  4  0
Therefore, the given pde is parabolic.

 2u  2u  2 u u u
5. Classify the following equation  4  4  2  0 . [A/M15]
x 2
x y y 2
x y
Here A  1 , B  4 , C  4
B 2  4 AC  4  4 14  16 16  0
2

Hence, the given equation is a parabolic equation.

6. Write down the standard five point formula to find the numerical solution of
Laplace equation. [A/M 10,N/D14,A/M15]

Standard five point formula is


u i, j 
1
4
 
u i 1, j  u i  1, j  u i , j 1  u i , j  1 .

7. Solve  2 U  0 numerically for the following square mesh with boundary values
as shown in figure [A/M11]

Page 51 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Initially we assume a = 1, b = 3. Using Standard five point formula, we get

The value of a  1 and b2

8. State the diagonal five-point formula for solving Laplace equation.


[M/J12,N/D13]

Diagonal five point formula is


u i, j 
1
4
 
u i 1, j  1  u i  1, j 1  u i 1, j 1  u i 1, j  1 .

9. What is the error for solving Laplace and Poisson’s equations by finite difference
method? [N/D10]

Error for solving Laplace and Poisson equations is the order of h2.

10. Write the difference scheme for solving the Poisson equation  2 u  f  x , y  .
[M/J12]
u i  1, j  u i  1, j  u i , j  1  4 u i , j  h f  i h , j h 
2

11. Write down the explicit finite difference method for solving one dimensional
wave equation. [A/M10,N/D15]

 
u i , j 1  2 1 2 a 2 u i , j  2 a 2  u i 1, j  u i 1, j   u i , j 1
1
To get the simplest form, choose  
a
u i , j  1  u i  1, j  u i 1, j  u i , j 1 .

Page 52 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

12. Write down one dimensional wave equation and its boundary conditions.
[M/J07]
One dimensional wave equation is  u x x  ut t
2

Boundary conditions are


(i) u t x , 0  0
(ii) u x , 0  f1
(iii) u 0 , t   f 2
(iv) u c , t   f 3

13. Write down Bender-Schmidt’s difference scheme in general form and using
suitable value of  , write the scheme in simplified form. [N/D12]

u i , j 1   u i  1, j  1  2  u i , j   u i 1, j
k k
where   2
 2 ( since a  1 )
ah h
1
To get the simplest form, choose   . Then
2
u i , j 1 
1
2

u i  1, j  u i 1, j 
14. State the implicit finite difference scheme for one dimensional heat equation.
[M/J06]
State Crank-Nicholson difference scheme for solving one dimensional heat
equation. [N/D10,N/D12,N/D15]

 u i  1, j  1  u i 1, j  1   2   1u i , j  1  2  1u i , j   u i  1, j  u i 1, j 


To get the simplest form, choose   1
u i , j  1   u i  1, j  1  u i 1, j  1  u i  1, j  u i 1, j 
1
4

15. State whether the Crank Nicholson’s scheme is an explicit or implicit scheme.
Justify. [M/J14]
The solution value at any point i , j 1 on the  j  1 level is dependent on the
th

 j  1th level and j th level values. Hence it is an implicit method.

 2u 2  u
2
16. Express  c in terms of difference approximation. [A/M15]
t 2 x 2
Given c 2 u xx  u tt  0 ...............1
u i 1 , j  2 u i , j  u i  1, j ui , j 1  2 u i , j  u i , j 1
Substituting u xx  2
and u tt  in 1 , we hav
h k2

 u i  1, j  2 u i , j  u i  1, j   u i , j  1  2 u i , j  u i , j  1 
c2  2  2 0
 h   k 
k c u i 1, j  2 k c u i , j  k c u i  1, j  h ui , j 1  2 h ui , j  h 2 u i , j  1  0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2
k 2 k 2 k 2
  c u i  1, j  2   c u i , j    c u i  1, j  u i , j  1  2 u i , j  u i , j  1  0
h h h
Page 53 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

2 ui , j  2 2 c 2 ui , j  2 c 2 ui 1, j  ui 1, j   u i , j 1  ui , j 1

 
ui , j 1  2 1  2 c 2 ui , j  2 c 2 ui 1, j  ui 1, j   ui , j 1 where  
k
h
.

17. Write the finite difference approximations of y x and y  x  . [A/M15,N/D15]


The finite difference approximation of y x and y  x  is given by
 yi  1  yi  1  yi  1  2 yi  yi 1
yi x   and yi x   , i  1, 2 , 3 , ........n  1 .
2h h2

18. Using finite difference solve y   y  0 given y0  0 , y1 1 , n  2 . [N/D13]


1
Given y   y  0 , y0  0 , y 2  1 , n h  1 implies 2 h  1 implies h 
2
Let y i  y i  0 ...........1
 yi 1  2 yi  yi  1
and h  in 1 , we have
1
Substituting yi  2
h 2
yi 1  2 yi  yi  1
2
 yi  0
1
 
2
4 yi 1  8 yi  4 yi  1  yi  0
4 y i 1  9 y i  4 y i  1  0 ..................... 2
Substituting i  1 in 2  , we have
4 y0  9 y1  4 y 2  0
Given y0  0 , y 2  1 , we have 4 0  9 y1  4 1  0 implies  9 y1   4 implies
4
y1  .
9

1
x 0 1
2

4
y 0 1
9

19. Write down the finite difference scheme for the differential equation
d2y dy
2
3 2. [M/J06]
dx dx

Page 54 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Given y n  3 y n  2
 y n 1  2 y n  y n  1   y n  1  y n 1 
 2 3 2
 h   2h 
   
2 y n 1  2 y n  y n  1  3 h y n  1  3 h y n 1  2 2 h 2
2  3 h yn 1  2 yn  2  3 h yn 1  4 h 2 .
d2y
20. Obtain the finite difference scheme for the differential equation 2 2  y  5 .
dx
[N/D06,N/D07,M/J13]
Given 2 y n  y n  5
 y n 1  2 y n  y n  1 
2   yn  5
 h2 
 
2 y n 1  2 y n  y n  1  h 2 y n  5
 
2 yn 1  h 2  2 yn  2 yn 1  5h 2
d2y
21. State finite difference approximation for and state the order of truncation
dx 2
error. [A/M08]

y n 1  2 y n  y n  1
y n 
h2

22. Write the finite difference scheme for the second order differential equation
1
y   f , h  . [N/D09]
n

y n 1  2 y n  y n  1
y n 
h2
Given y  f x , y  hence y n  f xn , y n  and h 
1
n

Therefore, f xn , yn   n 2 yn 1  2 yn  yn 1 
dy d2y
23. State central finite difference expression for and . [A/M11,N/D14,
dx dx 2
N/D15]

y n  1  y n 1
y n 
2h
y n 1  2 y n  y n  1
y n 
h2

24. Write down the difference equation to solve y   4 y  4 y  0 , y0  0 , y1 1 .


[N/D11]
Given y n  4 y n  4 y n  0
 y n 1  2 y n  y n  1   y n  1  y n 1 
 2   4   4 yn  0
 h   2h 

Page 55 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

ba 1
h 
n 4
Hence 2 y n  1  7 y n  6 y n  1  0 for n  1, 2 , 3 ,........

PART-B

1.Deduce the standard five point formula  2 u  0 . Hence solve it over the square region
by the boundary conditions as in the figure below: [A/M10,N/D15]

2.Solve the elliptic equation u xx  u yy  0 for the following square mesh with boundary
values as shown: [M/J12,N/D15]

3. Solve u x x  u y y  0 , for the following square mesh with boundary condition as shown
below. Iterate until the maximum difference between successive values at any grid point
is less than 0.001 . [A/M15]

Page 56 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

1 2
A B

uuuuuuu u1
1 2

2 1

C D
2 1
4.Given the values of u  x , y  on the boundary of the square in fig. evaluate the function
u  x , y  satisfying the Laplace equation  2 u  0 at the pivotal points of this fig. by
Gauss Seidel method. [A/M15]

1000 1000 1000 1000

u1 u2
2000 500

u3 u4
2000 0

1000 500 0 0

5.Solve u xx  u yy  0 over the square mesh of side 4 units satisfying the following
boundary conditions [A/M 10,N/D 11,M/J 12,N/D14]
(i) u0 , y   0 for 0  y  4
(ii) u4 , y   12  y for 0  y  4
(iii) ux , 0  3 x for 0  x  4
(iv) u x , 4  x 2 for 0  x  4
6.Solve  2 u  8 x 2 y 2 in the square region  2  x , y  2 with u  0 on the boundaries
after dividing the region into 16 subintervals of length 1 unit. [ N/D 10, M/J 13 ]
2
 2 2

7.Solve the equation  u  10 x  y 10 over the square mesh with sides x  0 ,
y  0 , x  3 , y  3 with u  0 on the boundary with mesh length 1unit.
[ A/M 11,N/D 12 , M/J14 ]
8.Solve  u  8 x y for square mesh given u  0 on the four boundaries dividing the
2 2 2

square into 16 sub squares of length 1 unit. [N/D11]

9.Solve the Poisson’s equation  2 u  8 x 2 y 2 for the square mesh of fig. with
ux , y   0 on the boundary and mesh length  1 . [A/M15]

Page 57 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

u1 u2 u1

u2 u3 u2

u1 u2 u1

10. By iteration method solve the elliptic equation u x x  u y y  0 over the square region of
side 4 , satisfying the boundary conditions.

i  u 0 , y   0 , 0  y  4 ii  u 4 , y  8  2 y , 0  y  4
x2
iii  u x , 0  , 0  x  4 iv  u x , 4  x 2 , 0 x4
4

Compute the values at the interior points correct to one decimal with h  k 1 . [N/D13]

11. Solve numerically 4 u xx  u tt with the boundary conditions u0 , t   0 , u4 , t   0 and
the initial conditions ut x , 0   0 and ux , 0  x 4  x , taking h  1 ( for 4 time steps )
[N/D10,N/D15]

12. Solve 25 u xx  utt  0 for u at the pivotal points, given u0 , t   u5 , t   0 ,
ut x , 0   0 and ux , 0  x 5  x for one half period of vibration (taking h  1 ).
[A/M11]
 u  u
2 2
u
13. Solve  2 , 0  x  1 , t  0 given ux , 0  0 , x , 0  0 , u0 , t   0 and
t 2
x t
u1, t  100 sin  t . Compute ux , t  for four times steps with h  0.25 . [N/D10]
 2u  2u
14. Solve the equation  2 , 0  x  1 , t  0 satisfying the conditions ux , 0  0 ,
x 2 t
u
x , 0  0 , u0 , t   0 and u 1, t   1 sin  t . Compute ux , t  for 4 time- steps by
t 2
1
taking h  . [N/D12]
4
2 u 2 u
15. Solve the wave equation  , 0  x  1 , t  0 , u 0 , t   u 1, t   0 , t  0 ,
 x2 t2
 1 , 0  x  0.5 u
u x , 0   and x , 0  0 , using h  k  0.1 , find u for three time
1 , 0.5  x 1 t
steps. [M/J14]

Page 58 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

16. Evaluate the Pivotal values of the equation u t t  16 u x x taking  x  1 upto t  1.25 .
The boundary conditions are u0 , t   u 5 , t   ut x , 0  0 and ux , 0  x 2 5  x  .
[A/M15]

17. Solve y t t  y x x upto t  0.5 with a spacing of 0.1 subject to y0 , t   0  y 1, t  ,
yt x , 0  0 and yx , 0  10  x 1  x . [A/M15]

18. Solve u t t  u x x , 0  x  2 , t  0 subject to u x , 0  0 , u t  x , 0   100 2 x  x 2 ,
u 0 , t   0 , u 2 , t   0 , choosing h 
1
compute u for four time steps. [N/D13]
2

2 f f
19. Given 
t
 
, f 0 , t   0  f 5 , t , f x , 0  x 2 25  x 2 , find f in the range
x 2

taking h  1 and upto 5 seconds. [A/M15]

20. Solve u t  u xx in 0 x5, t 0 given that u0 , t   0 , u5 , t   0 ,


 
ux , 0  x 25  x . Compute u up to t  2 with  x  1 , by using Bender-Schmidt
2 2

formula. [N/D10]
 u u
 
2
21. Solve  , given u0 , t   0 , u5 , t   0 , ux , 0  x 2 25  x 2 , find u in the
x 2
t
range taking h  1 up to 3 seconds using Bender-Schmidt recurrence equation. [A/M11]

 2 u u
22. Solve  , subject to u0 , t   u 1, t   0 , ux , 0  sin  x , 0  x  1 using
x 2 t
Bender-Schmidt method. [M/J12,N/D15]
 u u
2
23. Using Bender-Schmidt’s method solve  given u 0 , t   0 , u 1, t   0 ,
 x2 t
u x , 0  sin  x , 0  x 1 and h  0.2 . Find the value of u upto t  0.1 . [M/J14]

 2 u u
24. Solve  given u0 , t   0 , u4 , t   0 , ux , 0  x 4  x assuming h  k 1 .
x 2 t
Find the value of u upto t  5 . [A/M11]
k c2
25. Obtain the Crank-Nicholson finite difference method by taking   2  1 . Hence
h
 u u
2
find ux , t  in the rod for two times steps for the heat equation  , given
x 2 t
ux , 0  sin  x , u0 , t   0 , u1, t   0 . Take h  0.2 . [A/M10]
 u  2u
26. Solve the equation  subject to the condition ux , 0  sin  x , 0  x  1 ;
t  x2
u0 , t   u1, t   0 using Crank-Nicholson method. [A/M15]

Page 59 of 238
u  2 u
27. Using
II YEAR QUESTION Crank-Nicholson
BANK method, solve  DEPARTMENT x ,CIVIL
subject to uOF , u0 , t   0 - PEC
0  0ENGINEERING
t x 2
and u1, t   t (i) taking h  0.5 and k  and (ii) taking h  and k  . [A/M10]
1 1 1
8 4 8
 u u
2
28. Use Crank-Nicholson method to solve the equation  , satisfying the
x 2 t
conditions ux , 0  0 , u0 , t   0 and u1, t   200 t . Compute u for one time step,
taking  x  0.25 and  t  0.125 . [A/M11]

u  2 u
29. Solve  in 0  x  5 , t  0 given that ux , 0  20 , u0 , t   0 and u5 , t  100 .
t x 2
Compute u for one time step with h  1 by Crank-Nicholson method. [N/D11]
30. Using Crank-Nicholson implicit scheme, solve the heat equation
u xx  u t , t  0 , 0  x 1 subject to the conditions ux , 0  0 , u0 , t   0 and u1, t   t
for two time steps. [M/J12]
u  u 2
31. Using Crank-Nicolson’s scheme, solve 16  , 0  x  1 , t  0 subject to
 t  x2
u x , 0  0 , u 0 , t   0 , u 1, t  100 t . Compute u for one step in t direction taking
1
h [N/D13]
4

 2u  u
32. Solve by Crank-Nicholson’s method  for 0  x  1 , t  0 given that
 x2 t
u0 , t   0 , u1, t   0 and ux , 0  100 x 1 x . Compute u for one time step with
1 1
h  and k  . [N/D14]
4 64

33. Find the values of the function ux , t  satisfying the differential equation ut  4 u xx
x2
and the boundary condition u0 , t   0  u8 , t  and u x , 0  4 x  at the point
2
1
x  i , i  0 ,1, 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 , t  j , j  0 ,1, 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 . [N/D15]
8

34. Solve the boundary value problem y   x y subject to the conditions y0  y0 1 ,

y1 1 taking h  , by finite difference method.


1
[N/D10]
3
35. Using the finite difference method, compute y0.5 , given y   64 y  10  0 ,
x  0 , 1 , y0  y1  0 , subdividing the interval into (i) 4 equal parts (ii) 2 equal
parts. [N/D11]

36. Solve the equation y   x  y with the boundary conditions y0  y1  0 .
[M/J12,N/D15]

37. Solve y   y  0 with the boundary conditions y0  0 and y1 1. [N/D12]
38. Solve y   y  0 , with y0  0 , y1 1 using finite difference method with h  0.2 .
[A/M15,N/D15]
39. Solve y  y  x , x 0 ,1 given y0  y1  0 using finite differences by dividing
the interval into four equal parts. [M/J14]

Page 60 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

CE6401
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIALS

Page 61 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

CE6401 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

UNIT I STONES – BRICKS – CONCRETE BLOCKS (9) Stone as building material – Criteria
for selection – Tests on stones – Deterioration and Preservation of stone work – Bricks –
Classification – Manufacturing of clay bricks – Tests on bricks – Compressive Strength –
Water Absorption – Efflorescence – Bricks for special use – Refractory bricks – Cement,
Concrete blocks – Light weight concrete blocks.

UNIT II LIME – CEMENT – AGGREGATES – MORTAR (9) Lime – Preparation of lime


mortar – Cement – Ingredients – Manufacturing process – Types and Grades – Properties of
cement and Cement mortar – Hydration – Compressive strength – Tensile strength –
Fineness– Soundness and consistency – Setting time – Industrial byproducts – Fly ash –
Aggregates – Natural stone aggregates – Crushing strength – Impact strength – Flakiness
Index – Elongation Index – Abrasion Resistance – Grading – Sand Bulking.

UNIT III CONCRETE (9) Concrete – Ingredients – Manufacturing Process – Batching plants
– RMC – Properties of fresh concrete – Slump – Flow and compaction Factor – Properties of
hardened concrete – Compressive, Tensile and shear strength – Modulus of rupture – Tests
– Mix specification – Mix proportioning – BIS method – High Strength Concrete and HPC –
Self compacting Concrete – Other types of Concrete – Durability of Concrete.

UNIT IV TIMBER AND OTHER MATERIALS (9) Timber – Market forms – Industrial
timber– Plywood – Veneer – Thermacole – Panels of laminates – Steel – Aluminum and
Other Metallic Materials – Composition – Aluminium composite panel – Uses – Market
forms – Mechanical treatment – Paints – Varnishes – Distempers – Bitumens.

UNIT V MODERN MATERIALS (9)


glass – Ceramics – Sealants for joints – Fibre glass reinforced plastic – Clay products –
Refractories – Composite materials – Types – Applications of laminar composites – Fibre
textiles – Geomembranes and Geotextiles for earth reinforcement. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Varghese.P.C, "Building Materials", PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.

2. Rajput. R.K., "Engineering Materials", S. Chand and Company Ltd., 2008.

3. Shetty.M.S., "Concrete Technology (Theory and Practice)", S. Chand and Company


Ltd.,2008.

4. Gambhir.M.L., "Concrete Technology", 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 2004

Page 62 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

5. Duggal.S.K., "Building Materials", 4th Edition, New Age International , 2008.

REFERENCES:

1. Jagadish.K.S, "Alternative Building Materials Technology", New Age International, 2007.

2. Gambhir. M.L., & Neha Jamwal., "Building Materials, products, properties and systems",
Tata McGraw Hill Educations Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.

3. IS456 – 2000: Indian Standard specification for plain and reinforced concrete, 2011

4. IS4926–2003 : Indian Standard specification for ready–mixed concrete, 2012

5. IS383–1970: Indian Standard specification for coarse and fine aggregate from natural
Sources for concrete, 2011 6. IS1542–1992: Indian standard specification for
sandforplaster,2009.

Page 63 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

PANIMALAR ENGINEERING COLLEGE


DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
COURSE INFORMATION SHEET

PROGRAMME : CIVIL ENGINEERING DEGREE : B.E YEAR OF STUDY :


2016-2017

COURSE: CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS SEMESTER: FOURTH, CREDITS : 3


COURSE CODE : CE6401 REGULATION : 2013 COURSE TYPE : CORE
COURSE AREA/DOMAIN : CONSTRUCTION CONTACT HOURS: 5
MATERIALS/ ENGINEERING

CORRESPONDING LAB COURSE CODE: CE6612 LAB COURSE NAME : CONCRETE AND
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING LABOROTARY

COURSE PRE-REQUISTIES
C.CODE COURSE NAME DESCRIPTION YEAR/SEM

CE6401 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS To be knowledgeable about the II/IV


materials used in the engineering
construction

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce students to various materials commonly used in civil engineering
1.
construction and their properties
2. Be able to apply core concepts in Materials Science to solve engineering problems
3. Be able to design and conduct experiments, and to analyze data.
4. Possess the skills and techniques necessary for modern materials engineering practice.

COURSE OUTCOMES
SNO DESCRIPTION
CO 1 Compare the properties of most common and advanced building materials
CO 2 Understand the typical and potential applications of these materials

CO 3 Understand the relationship between material properties and structural form

CO 4 Understand the importance of experimental verification of material properties

Page 64 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

COURSE SPECIFIC OUTCOMES


SNO DESCRIPTION
CSO 1 Be knowledgeable of contemporary issues relevant to Materials used in the
engineering.
CSO 2 Be able to select materials for design and construction

CSO 3 To know the applications of various modern engineering materials

Mapping Course Aims along with Course Final Results

Course
Course
S.No. Course Objectives specific
Outcomes
Outcomes
1. To introduce students to various materials CO1,CO3 CSO2,CSO3
commonly used in civil engineering
construction and their properties
2. Be able to apply core concepts in Materials CO1,CO2, CO4 CSO1,CSO2,CSO3
Science to solve engineering problems
3. Be able to design and conduct CO3,CO4 CSO3,CS02
experiments, and to analyze data.
4. Possess the skills and techniques CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 CSO1,CSO2,CSO3
necessary for modern materials
engineering practice

Page 65 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

CE6401 - CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

UNIT - 1
STONES –BRICKS - CONCRETE BLOCKS
PART- A (2 MARKS)

1. What are the classifications of rock?


a) Geological classification b) physical classification c) chemical classification

2. What are the geological classifications of rock?


a) Igneous rock b) Sedimentary rock c) Metamorphic rock

3. Write any two characteristics of good building stones. (N/D’1 , A/M’1


a) It should have a pleasing appearance and uniform colour.
b) It should have fine compact grained structure so that it could be worked with easily.A
fine grained stone can be easily carved in any desired shape

4. Discuss the criteria for selection of stone.


There is not a single stone available in nature which can be used with advantage, for
almost all types of works. For different types of work, different qualities of stones with
specific properties are required. Experience is the only criteria for the selection of stone.

5. List down the tests for stone used in the laboratory


a) Crushing strength test b) hardness test c) abrasion test d) water absorption test
e) Acid test f) crystallisation test h) Weathering test

6. What are the preservatives commonly used for stone?


a) Coal tar b) Linseed oil c) Paint d) Paraffin e) Alum and soap f) Baryta solution

7. Write any two reasons for deterioration of stone


a) Rain b) Temperature c) Wind d) Atmospheric impurities

8. Define porosity?
It is defined as the degree to which volume of the material is interspersed with pores. It is
expressed as the ration of the volume of pores to that of the specimen.

9. Define Dressing
The art of shaping a stone is known as dressing. Stones should possess uniform texture and
softness so that they may be easily dressed.

Page 66 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

10. What is meant by seasoning of stone?


Good stone must also be free from quarry sap. To ensure this, the stones after quarrying
and dressing should be left for a period of 6 to 12 months for proper seasoning before
using in construction work

11. What are the uses of stone?


a) Construction of buildings exposed to high wind blowing particles
b) Used in heavy engineering works i.e, walls, foundations and super structure
c) Used in road metal and railway ballast
d) Used in general building work i.e, walls, foundations and superstructure

12. List any few names of stone?


a) Granite b) Marble and slate c) Lime stone d) Sandstone

13. Differentiate stone and brick


S.NO STONE BRICK
1. It is obtained from rocks It is obtained from clay
2. Hard and tough Hard and sound

14. What are the chemical compositions of brick earth?


a) Silica b) Alumina c) Lime d) Iron oxide

15. Write down the requirements of good brick earth.


1. It must have proper proportions of sand, silt and clay
2. It must be Homogenous

16. Write down the steps involved in the manufacture of bricks


a) Preparation of clay b) Moulding c) Drying d) Burning

17. What are the qualities of good bricks?


 A good brick should show fine, compact and uniform structure in broken form
 A good brick should give a clear metallic ringing sound when struck with another
brick.

18. List any 2 types of special bricks


a) Bull-nosed bricks b) Specially shaped bricks c) Bull nosed bricks d) plinth bricks

Page 67 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

19. What is meant by Refractory Bricks?


The term Refractories embraces all materials used for the construction of heat resisting
containers, using in its broadest sense, whether it be a afford space for evolution of gases in
combustion processes or the holding of molten charges or of solids undergoing heat
treatment

20. What are the defects in bricks?


a) Efflorescence b) cracks d) Spots d) Blisters

21. What are the compositions of good brick earth?


a) Alumina b) Silica c) Lime d) Oxide of iron e) Magnesia

22. What are the tests for bricks?


a) Absorption b) Crushing strength c) Hardness d) Presence of soluble salts e) Shape
and size f) Soundness g) Structure.

23. What are the classifications of bricks?


a) Unburnt or sun dried bricks b) Burnt bricks

24. What are the classifications of burnt bricks?


a) First class bricks b) Second class Bricks c) Third Class bricks d) Fourth class
bricks

25. Write any two uses of bricks.


a) The first class bricks are specified for obtaining the architectural effects on faces
of structures b) The second class brick is generally plastered to make the smooth surface
obtained due to irregular shape and size of bricks. c) The third class bricks are used for
construction work of temporary nature. d) The fourth class bricks are used as road metal
and as road metal and as aggregate in the foundation concrete.

19. What are the processes involved in the manufacture of concrete blocks?
a) Selection and proportion of ingredients b) Mixing of ingredients c) Placing and
vibration d) Curing

20. Write two advantages of concrete blocks


a) It increases the carpet area of the building because of small width of concrete
block as compared to the brick masonry wall. b) It provides better thermal insulation,
enhanced fire resistance and sound absorption c) It results in the saving of precious
agricultural land which is used for the manufacture of bricks.

Page 68 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

21. List any four tests on stones? (A/M’15)


a) Hardness test bCrushing test c) Impact test d) Attrition test

22. Define the term efflorescence (A/M’15)


A good brick should not contain much alkaline salts, which may cause efflorescence on its
surface and decay the brick. The deposits on the surface of concrete resulting from the
calcium hydroxide and subsequent carbonation and evaporation are termed as
efflorescence

PART – B (16 Marks)


1. Explain in detail about the testing of stones

2. Write about the qualities of stone and methods of quarrying

3. What are the qualities of an ideal preservative? Mention the preservatives which are
commonly used?

4. Explain the characteristics of good building stones?

5. What are the various agencies which bring the deterioration of stones?

6. List down the requirements of good brick earth and the composition of good brick earth

7. Explain in detail about the tests used for brick earth.

8. Explain in detail about the tests used for clay bricks. N/D’15)

9. Write a short note on special bricks.

10. Explain briefly about the refractory bricks

11. What are the causes of defects in bricks?

12. Write the comparison of brickwork and stonework.

13. Write short notes on classification of bricks and shapes of bricks.

14. Write in brief about the raw materials, manufacturing process and advantages of
concrete blocks.

15. Write short notes on preparation and advantages of light weight concrete blocks.

16. Explain in detail about cement concrete blocks.

Page 69 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

17. Explain in detail about the manufacturing process of bricks. A/M’15, A/M’1 )

18. Explain the recent advancement in bricks (A/M’15)

19. Expalin the various types of stones which are used for building works and give in brief
the specifications for a good building stone. A/M’1

UNIT - 2
LIME – CEMENT – AGGREGATE – MORTAR
PART- A (2 MARKS)

1. Define lime.
Due to calcinations of lime stone, the moisture and carbon dioxide are removed
from it. The product which remains their after is called as lime.

2. What are the sources of lime?


 Limestone hills
 In the beds of old rivers
 Kankar found below the ground
 Shells of sea animals

3. What are the properties of lime?


 Provides strength to the masonry
 Possesses good plasticity
 It has good resistant to moisture
 It has low shrinkage in drying

4. Define hydraulic lime.


The lime containing small quantities of silica, alumina and iron oxide, which are in chemical
combination with calcium oxide and can set and become hard even in the absence of CO 2
and can set under water

5. What are the classifications of lime?


a) Fat lime b) Hydraulic lime c) Poor lime

6. Define slaked lime?


It is formed by the absorption of water by quick lime and is the hydrated oxide of calcium
Ca (OH)2

Page 70 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

7. What are the uses of lime?


a) It is used as a matrix for concrete b) To carry out pointing and plaster work on
exposed surface of masonry

8. What are the constituents of Limestone?


a)Clay b)Soluble silica C) Magnesium carbonate d)Alkalies and metallic oxides

9. Define pozzolana
The volcanic dust containing 80 percent clay with lime, magnesia and iron oxide in varying
proportions is called pozzolana

10. Define slaking


It is the process of chemical combination of quick lime with required quantity of water for
killing the heat and getting into powder form for use.

11. Define hydraulicity


It is the property due to which lime /cement will set in damp places or underwater or in
thick masonry walls where there is no free access of air

13. Define cement?


A small quantity of gypsum is added to the clinker and it is then pulverized into a
very fine powder which is known as the cement.

14. What are the properties of cement?


a) It gives strength to the masonry b) It is an excellent binding material

15. What is Bogue’s Compounds?


(i) Tricalcium aluminate (ii) Tetra Calcium alumino ferrite (iii) Tricalcium Silicate
(iv) Dicalcium Silicate

16. Define heat of hydration.


The setting of concrete is due to the chemical reaction between water and cement
compounds is known as hydration

17. What are the standard tests for cement?


a) Chemical composition b) Fineness c) Compressive Strength d) Tensile Strength e)
Consistency f) Setting time g) Soundness

18. What are the artificial pozzolonic materials?


a) Fly ash b) Blast furnace c) Silica fume d) Rice husk ash e) Metakaoline f) Surkhi

Page 71 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

19. Write any five types of cement


a) Acid resistant cement b) Blast furnace cements c) Coloured cement d) Expanding
cement e) High alumina cement f) Hydrophobic cement g) Low heat cement.
20. What are the field tests for cement?
a) Colour b) Physical properties c) Presence of lumps d) Strength

21. What are the grades of cement?


a) 33 Grade b) 43 Grade c) 53 Grade

22. Write any 2 requirements of good cement?


 Initial setting time should be not less than 30 minutes
 Final setting time should not be more than 10 hours

23. Write down the classification of pozzolana


a) Natural pozzolana b) Artificial pozzolana

23. Define mortar?


It is a mechanical mixture in varying proportions of a binding material like cement or lime
and an inert material or fine aggregate like sand, Surkhi etc

24. What are the uses of mortar?


 Used to binding agent i.e between the bricks or stones
 Used to improve the general appearance of structure

25. What are the types of mortar?


a) Lime mortar b) Cement mortar c) Lime cement mortar

26. What are the classifications of aggregates?


a) Natural weight aggregate b) Light weight aggregate c) Heavy weight aggregate

27. What are tests conducted for the aggregates? N/D’15)


a) Crushing value b) Impact value c) Abrasion value d) Los angeles test e) Modulus
of elasticity test f) Flakiness test g) Elongation test

28. What is sand bulking? A/M’1


The presence of moisture in sand increases the volume of sand. This is due to the fact the
moisture causes of water around sand particles which results in the increase of volume of
sand.

Page 72 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

29. Define grading of aggregate


It is the particle size distribution of the aggregate.
30. What are the aggregate shape tests?
a) Aggregate Flakiness test b) Aggregate Elongation Index test

31. What are the three distinct operations involved in the manufacture of cement?
a) Mixing of raw materials b) Burning c) Grinding

32. What are the normal ingredients of cement? (A/M’1 )


a) Lime b) silica c) alumina d) calcium sulphate e) iron oxide f) magnesia g) sulphur h)
alkalies

33. Define Elongation index A/M’15)


Elongation index of an aggregate is the percentage by weight of the particles whose greater
dimension (length) is greater than one and four fifths (1.8 times) their mean dimensions

PART – B (16 Marks)


1. Write down the manufacture process of lime

2. Explain in detail about the classification of lime.

3. What are various properties of cement mortar?

4. Explain the manufacture process of ordinary Portland cement

5. Explain the ingredients of cement

6. Explain in detail about the types of cement.

7. Write a short note on grading of cement.

8. Explain the various tests conducted for cement. N/D’15)

9. Write a short note on sand bulking.

10. Explain the hydration process of cement. A/M’1

11. Explain the natural and artificial pozzolonic materials.

12. Explain the types of mortars.

13. Explain the various tests of aggregate. N/D’15)

Page 73 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

14. Explain about grading of aggregates.

15. How do you perform the compressive strength of cement mortar cube? Also explain the
procedure for fineness of cement A/M’15)

16. Explain with codal provision for testing of conventional coarse aggregate A/M’15)

17. What are tests to be conducted for conventional coarse aggregates? Explain any four
tests in detail. A/M’1

18. How do you perform the soundness test of cement? Why it is important? A/M’1

19. Describe the manufacturing process of cement. N/D’15)

UNIT-3
CONCRETE
PART- A (2 MARKS)

1. Define concrete

It is a mixture of cement, sand, stone ballast and water, which when placed in forms and
allowed to cure, becomes hard like stone

2. What are the ingredients of concrete?


Cement, Aggregate, Water, Chemical Admixture and supplementary cementing
materials..

3. What are the characteristics of good concrete?


Strength, Durability, Workability

4. What are the advantages of concrete?


a)High compressive strength b)It is high durable and has high resisting properties

5. List down the uses of concrete


a) Foundations b) Docks&harbours c) Buildings d)Dams

6. Write any few types of concrete?


a) Light weight concrete b) aerated concrete c) No fines concrete d) High density
concrete e) Sulphur infiltrated concrete f) Fibre reinforced concrete g) Polymer concrete

7. Write any two Functions of admixtures?


 To accelerate the initial setting of concrete

Page 74 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

 To improve the strength of concrete

8. What are accelerators?


The agents that are added to the cement to make it set and acquire strength more rapidly
are called accelerators.

9. Give an example for natural and artificial puzzolana


Natural puzzolana – Clay sand shales
Artificial puzzolana – flyash

10. What are the processes of manufacture of concrete?


Batching, Mixing, Transporting, Placing, Compacting, Curing and Finishing.

11. Define batching?


The measurement of material for making concrete is known as batching

12. What are the two types of batching?


a) Volume batching b) Weight Batching

13. Define compaction of concrete. A/M’1


It is the process to get rid of the entrapped air and voids, elimination of segregation
occurred and to form a homogeneous dense mass.

14. What is meant by curing?


The concrete surfaces are kept wet for a certain period after placing of concrete so
as to promote the hardening of cement. It consists of a control of temperature and of the
moisture movement from and into the concrete

15. Define water-cement ratio


Water reacts with cement chemically and causes setting and hardening of concrete

16. Define Workability. N/D’15)


The property of freshly mixed concrete which determines the ease and
homogeneity, with which it can be mixed, placed, compacted and finished.

17. What are the tests used for the measurement of workability?
a) Slump Test b) Compacting Factor Test c) Flow Test d) Kelly ball Test e) Vee Bee
Consist meter Test.

Page 75 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

18. Define shotcrete


It is the concrete conveyed through a hose and pneumatically projected at a high velocity
on a surface

19. Define consistency


It is the relative mobility or ability of a freshly mixed concrete to flow.

20. What are the tests for Hardened concrete?


a) Compression Strength Test b) Flexure Strength Test c) Tensile Strength Test

21. What are the factors affecting Workability?


a) Water Content b) Mix proportion c) Size and Shape of Aggregate d) grading of
aggregate e) Use of admixture f) Surface Texture.

22. Define RMC?


It is produced under factory conditions and permits a close control of all operations of
manufacture and transportation of fresh concrete

23. Define fineness modulus


It is used to indicate an index number which is roughly proportional to the average size of
the particle in the entire quantity of aggregate

24. What are the mixes used in concrete works


a)1:1:2 b)1:1.5:3 c)1:2:4 d)1:2.5:5

25. Define Durability of concrete


It is defined as its ability to resist weathering action, chemical attack, abrasion or
any other process of deterioration.

26. Define creep of concrete


The increase of strain in concrete with time under sustained stress is termed as
creep.
27. Define SCC
Making concrete without vibration is called self compacting concrete. It flows to a
virtually uniform level under the influence of gravity without segregation during which it
deaerates and completely fills the formwork and the spaces between the reinforcement
without any need for induced compactions

Page 76 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

28. What is High performance concrete?


It is defined as the concrete in which certain characteristics are developed for a
particular application on environment, so that it will give an excellent performance in the
structure in which it will be placed, in the environment to which it will be exposed, and
with the loads to which it will be subjected during its design life.

29. List the grades of concrete


M10, M15, M20 = Ordinary concrete
M25, M30, M35, M40, M45, M50, M55 = Standard concrete
M60, M65, M70, M75, M80 = High strength concrete

30. Define Shrinkage


The effect of volume change due to thermal properties of aggregate and concrete and due
to alkali/aggregate reaction, due to sulphate action etc., is called as shrinkage.

31. What is Light weight concrete?


The bulk density of ordinary concrete is about 23KN/m3. The concrete having bulk
density between 5 to 18 KN/m3 is known as the light weight concrete.

32. What is meant by modulus of rupture? (April/May 2015)


It is defined as an ultimate strength pertaining to the failure of beams by flexure equal to the
bending moment at rupture divided by the section modulus of the beam. The determination of
flexural tensile strength is essential to estimate the load at which the concrete members
may crack. Thus the flexural tensile strength at failure is also known as modulus of rupture

33. Define HPC as per ACI (April/May 2015)


The American Concrete Committee on HPC (ACI 1993) includes the following six criteria
for material selections, mixing, placing and curing procedures for concrete
1) Ease of placement 2) Long term mechanical properties 3) Early age strength 4)
Toughness 5) Life in severe environments 6) Volume stability

PART – B (16 Marks)


1. Write a short note on factors affecting rheological properties of fresh concrete.

2. Explain briefly about the classification of concrete

3. Explain the manufacturing process of concrete. A/M’1

4. Write short notes on workability of concrete and the factors affecting the workability of
concrete.

Page 77 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

5. What are the tests used for fresh & hardened concrete? N/D’15)

6. Explain the Test parameters related to specimen and loading which affect the strength of
concrete.

7. Write short notes on production and classification of Ready mixed concrete.

8. What are the methods of proportioning concrete?

9. Design the mix of M30.

10. Explain in detail about the factors affecting the mix proportion

11. Write short notes on high strength concrete.

12. Write short notes on high performance concrete and the factors affecting the HPC.

13. Write short notes on any three of the followings


a) Durability and its significance b) Permeability of concrete c) Creep and its importance
d) Shrinkage and factors affecting it.

14. With neat sketches explain the self compacting concrete and the tests conducted for
SCC.

15. What are the tests used for the measurement of workability?

16. With sketches explain in detail about the different flow properties of concrete
A/M’15)

17. With sketches explain the various specifications for self compacting concrete A/M’15)

18. Write down the complete procedure of concrete mix design as per BIS. Assume
necessary data. A/M’16)

19. Write in detail about (i) Curing (ii) High strength concrete N/D’15)
UNIT-4
TIMBER AND OTHER MATERIALS
PART- A (2 MARKS)

1. Define Timber
It denotes wood which is suitable for building or carpentry or various other
engineering purposes and is applied to the trees measuring not less than 600mm in girth or
circumference of the trunk.

Page 78 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

2. What are the properties of good timber?


 It should have a uniform colour
 It should free from shakes,flaws,dead knots
3. What are the disadvantages of timber?
 It is easily Combustible
 It swells and undergoes shrinkage with changing atmospheric humidity

4. What are the classifications of trees?


a) Exogenous trees b)Endogenous Trees

5. What are the qualities of good timber?


a) Appearance b) Colour c) Defects d) Durability e) Strength

6. What are the market forms of timber?


a) Batten b) Baulk c) Board d) Deal e) End f) Log g) Plank h) Pole i) Quartering j)
Scantling

7. Define Industrial Timber


The timber which is prepared scientifically in a factory is called Industrial Timber.

8. What are the various varities of industrial timber?


a) Veneers b) Plywood c) Fibre board d) Impreg Timber e) Compreg Timber

9. What are the uses of timber?


a) It is used for doors and window frames, shutter of doors and windows, roofing
materials
b) It is used for railway sleepers, packing cases.
c) It is used for making furniture, agricultural instruments, and musical instruments.
d) It is used for form work of cement concrete, centering of an arch, scaffoldings.

10. What is meant by seasoning of timber? N/D’15)


The water is to be removed before the timber can be used for any engineering
purposes. In other words the timber is to be dried. This process of drying of timber is
known as seasoning of timber.

11. Define pith


The pith or medulla is the innermost central portion or core of the tree. It consists of
cellular tissues and it nourishes the plant in its young age

Page 79 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

12. What is meant by Sap Wood?


The outer annual rings between heartwood and cambium layer is known as sap wood

13. What are the defects caused due to seasoning?


(i)Bow (ii) Case hardening (iii) Check (iv) Collapse

14. What are the methods for preservation of timber?


(i) Tarring (ii) Charring (iii) Painting (iv) Creosoting

15. What are the methods of seasoning of timber?


(i) Natural seasoning (ii) Artificial seasoning

16. List the methods of sawing timber


(i) ordinary sawing (ii) Tangential Sawing (iii)Radial Sawing (iv) Quarter sawing

17. Define veneers.


It is a thin sheets or slices of wood of quality. The thickness of veneers varies from 0.40mm
to 6 mm

18. Define Batten board.


The batten board is a solid block with core of sawn thin wood. Its core thickness varies
from 20 to 25mm and the total thickness of board is 50mm

19. Write few common timber trees which is found in India.


(1)Deodar (2) Babul (3) Teak (4) Mango

20. What is steel?


If there is no free graphite in the composition of a material is said to be steel.

21. What are processes in the manufacturing of steel?


a) Bessemer process b) Cementation Process c) Crucible steel process d) Electric
process e) Duplex process

22. What are the defects in steel?


(i)Cavities or blow holes (2) Cold shortness (3) Red shortness (4) Segregation

23. What is the mechanical treatment of steel?


(i) Drawing (ii) Forging (iii) Pressing (iv) Rolling

Page 80 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

24. What are the processes involved in the heat treatment of steel?
(i) Annealing (ii) Case hardening (iii) Hardening (iv) Nitriding

25. Mention the various market forms of steel. A/M’16)


(i)Angle Sections (ii) Channel Sections (iii) Corrugated sheets (iv) Flat bars

26. Define paint. N/D’15)


The paints are coatings of fluid materials and they are applied over the surfaces of
timber and metals

27. What is meant by varnishes?


It is a transparent solution of resinous materials and they are applied over the
painted surfaces

28. What is distemper?


They are applied over the painted surfaces. They are comparatively cheap
decorative paints for walls and ceilings

29. What are the functions of solvent?


a) It is to make the paint thin so that it can be easily applied on the surface
b) It also helps the paint in penetrating through the porous surfaces.
The most commonly used solvent is spirit of turpentine

30. What are the common constituents of an oil paint?


a) Base b) Vehicle C) Pigment D) Solvent

31. What are different types of paints?


a) Aluminum paint b) anti corrosive paint c) asbestos paint d) bituminous paint e)
cellulose paint f) cement paint

32. Define Base.


These are a principal constituent of paint and possess the binding properties. The
commonly used bases are white lead, Zinc, White &Lead

33. Explain the term pigment.


A colouring pigment or stainer is a finely divided solid material which provides required
shade and colour to the paint.

Page 81 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

33. What is meant by bitumen?


It is the binding material which is present in asphalt. It is also called as mineral tar.It
is obtained by partial distillation of crude petroleum

34. What are the usual forms of bitumen?


a) Bitumen emulsion b) blown bitumen c) cut back bitumen d) plastic bitumen e)
straight run bitumen

35. What are the types of varnishes?


a)Oil Varnishes (b)Spirit varnishes (c)Turpentine (d) Water

36. What are the properties of aluminium?


a) It is very soft
b) It is a very good conductor of heat and electricity
c) It is a non-magnetic substance
d) It is light in weight, malleable and ductile

37. What are different forms of aluminiun?


a) Casting based b) extrusion based c) Foil and powder based d) sheet based

38. What are the uses of aluminum? A/M’16)


a) It is used as a reducing agent in the manufacture of steel
b) It is used in the casting of steel
c) It is used in the manufacture of electric conductors
d) It is used in the manufacture of paints in powder form

39. Write down the definition of iron ore?


An ore may be defined as a solid naturally occurring mineral aggregate, of economic
interest, from which, one or more valuable constituents may be recovered by certain
treatment.

40. What are the advantages of thermacole? (April/May 2015)


Thermacole is a light and cellular plastic material used for sound and heat insulation for
ceiling, walls, and refrigerators and for air conditioning of the buildings. It is soft ,light ,
strong and durable having compressive strength in 11.7 to 14.4 N/mm2. It has excellent
heat, sound and electric insulating properties

41. What are the advantages of bituminous road?


a) Bituminous surfaces resist wear, weathering, and deterioration from aging with only
minimal maintenance.

Page 82 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

b)Bituminous wearing surfaces provide a resilient,\waterproof medium that protects the b


ase course from water and traffic. Properly designedbituminous wearing surfaces, when co
mpared with concrete, are less affected by temperature strains

42. What are the advantages of bituminous road over concrete roads? (April/May
2015)
Bituminous materials are highly versatile, andserve admirably in temporary,expedient, and
light traffic situations (where concrete is not justifiable), itis equally true thatthicker bitum
inous pavement designed for heavy and continuing duty are fully comparable toconcrete de
signed for the same service, consisting of heavy volumes of traffic or heavy wheelloads.
This is true not only for highways, roads and streets, but also for airfields

PART – B (16 Marks)


1. Explain the seasoning of timber? Methods adopted for seasoning of timber.
2. Write short notes on Decay and preservation of timber
3. What is meant by industrial timber? What are its varities?
4. What are the different methods of preservation of timber?
5. List the wood based products in detail with its advantages.
6. Explain the manufacturing process of steel.
7. What are the factors which affects physical properties of steel?
8. Explain in detail about the heat treatment of steel.
9. Discuss the different market forms of aluminium.
10. Give a brief description of the process of painting on different surfaces and the
constituents of paint.
11. Explain in detail about the types of paints with its advantages.
12. Mention the objects of varnishing and point out the characteristics of an ideal varnish.
13. Mention the objects of distempering and enumerate its ingredients. How it is applied?
14. Explain the properties and uses of non-ferrous metals which are commonly used in
engineering structures.
15. Write short notes on Asphalt, Bitumen and tar.
16. Explain the manufacturing process and civil engg applications of steel (A/M’15)
17. Explain in detail about (A/M 15)
(i)Aluminium composite panel
(ii)Distemper
(iii)Paint
18. Discuss the possible sources of defects in timber. 8 A/M’16)
19. Briefly explain the following terms: 8 A/M’1
(i) Veneer
(ii)Thermacole

Page 83 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

20. Explain in detail about A/M’16, N/D’1 )


(i)Preparation of paint
(ii) Distemper
(iii) Bitumen
21. Enumerate the advantages of aluminium in construction. 8 N/D’15)
22. Explain the defects in timber. 8 N/D’15)
UNIT V
MODERN MATERIALS
PART- A (2 MARKS)

1. Define glass
It is the mixture of number of metallic silicates, one of which is usually that of an
alkali metal.

2. Write down the classification of glass


a) Soda lime glass b) Potash lime glass c) Potash lead glass

3. What are the properties of glass?


a) It absorbs, refracts or transmits light b) It has no sharp melting point c) It is
affected by alkali. d) It has no definite crystalline structures.

4. What are the procedures adopted in the manufacture of glass?


a) collection of raw materials b) Preparation of batch c) Melting in furnace d)
Fabrication e) Annealing.
5. What are the uses of glass?
a) Used in the construction of furniture,cars,trucks etc
b) Used in the construction of walls &ceilings

6. Define ceramics
It refers to polycrystalline materials and products formed by baking natural clays and
mineral admixtures at a high temperature and also by sintering oxides of various metals
and inorganic substances having high melting point

7. Define the term fibre glass reinforced plastic:


It is formed by using two materials in conjunction with each other to form a
composite material of altogether different properties.

8. Write down the properties of FRP.


a) Aesthetic appeal b) corrosion resistance c) dimensional stability d) durability

Page 84 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

9. What are refractories?


It is used to indicate substances that are able to resist high temperature.

10. What are the classifications of refractories?


a) According to chemical properties b) according to resistance to temperature.

11. What are the three categories of ceramic products?


a) Clay products b) Refractories c) Glass

10. What is clay?


It is a distinct product of chemical weathering of igneous rock.

11. What is the clay products used in building industry?


a) Tiles b) Terracotta c) Earthen wares d) Stone wares e) bricks.

12. What are the characteristics of a good tile?


 It should posses uniform colour
 It should properly burnt

13. What is geomembrane?


Geomembranes are impermeable membranes that are used to line canals, pits, and
ponds. They are also used in landfills to help prevent chemicals or other dangerous
leachate from polluting surrounding areas.Essentially, geomembranes are useful
whereverliquid movement needs to be controlled.
14. What is Textile fibre? N/D’15)
Textile fibres can be created from many natural sources (animal hair or fur, insect
cocoons as with silk worm cocoons), as well as semisynthetic methods that use naturally-
occurring polymers, and synthetic methods that use polymer-based materials, and even
minerals such as metals to make foils and wires
15. Define fibre.
It is defined as one of the delicate, hair portions of the tissues of a plant or animalor other
substances that are very small in diameter in relation to there length

16. What is geosynthetics?


They are artificial fabrics used in conjuction with soil or rock as an integral part of a man
made project

17. What are the characteristics of good sealants? (A/M’15)


 Typically made of synthetic elastomeric materials
 Good adhesion & cohesion

Page 85 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

 Good elasticity
 Good weathering Characteristics

18. Differentiate geo membranes and geo textiles? (A/M’15, A/M’1 )


Geotextiles are permeable fabrics which, when used in association with soil, have the
ability to separate, filter, reinforce, protect or drain.
Geomembranes are impermeable membranes used widely as cut-offs and liners.

PART – B (16 Marks)


1. Explain the composition and properties of glass (A/M’1 )

2. Write short notes on the manufacturing process of glass and types of glass.

3. Write about fibre glass reinforced plastic.

4. Give brief notes on clay products. (A/M’1 )

5. Explain the composite materials and its types

6. Write down the application of laminar composites

7. Explain the classification of Refractories. N/D’15)

8. Explain about geomembrane and geotextiles for earth reinforcement. A/M’1

9. Give a brief notes on sealants for joints.

10. Explain the three categories of ceramics.

11. Explain in detail about A/M’15)


(i) Ceramics (ii) Fibre glass reinforced plastic

12. Describe the various applications of (i) Laminar Composites (ii) Geo textiles A/M’15)

Page 86 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 87 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 88 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 89 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 90 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK 124 DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

B.E.IB.Tech. DEGREE EXAMINATION, APRIUMAY2015.


• L⦅セN@ • • c -' • ., _ . , • .' , • •

" FourthSelllester

Civil eョァゥセ・イ@ . . . . ..

eE 64QI-CONSTRUCTIQN
|セ@ .
MATERIALS'

·.(Comnion·to
..'
.Envirdnmental Engineenng) . Bセ@ .

., . .
.(Regulation
, 2013) . , .
Tillle:Three hours Maximum: 100 marks

,killswer ALL guestions.


セ@ " '

PAR1'A-" (l()x 2 セRP@ marks),


, .
セN@ ,. ....' . - .'. ,-,',

: List any four' tests on stones..


, ... ' "

. .
'2. . Define the term Efflorescence. '
, \. . <' < .' Nセ@ • セ@
'
What.are,the norlllalingredjents ッヲ」セュ・ョエ_@
....".-c,'

,3.
4. . Define ElongaWmindex.)
',5. Whatis,meani,by niodulus ofrupture? , ;
:-\-:"

6. DefineHPC as ーセイ@ ACt, '


7. What. 。イセG@ theadvantagesofThermacole?
8. What
.
are the
.
advantages
' . ofbiturri,inous rOl;ldsover concrete roads?
;,--, . , , , - . ' , ..... " .

9. What a:r;e the characteristics Of good sealants?


10.. Differentiate geo membrallesarid geo textiles .
.. \ .

PART B -. ,(5x QVセ@ 80marks)

11. (a)'Explain
.
in detail aboutthemanufacturiflg
- "
proceSs of bricks.
. \ " . , ' . , . " , -

Or
, .

,(b) Explai,ntherecent advancements in' bricks.


Page 91 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK :125.
DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

12." (a) How do you perform エィセ」ッュー・ウゥョ@ strength.ofcementmortar cube?


. Msoexplain the pro,cedure for fineness of cement. .','

Or "

(b) Explain with codal.provision '. for エセウゥョァ@ of. conventional coarse
aggregates.

'13. (a) "With ウォ・エセィGNーャ。ゥョ@ in detail about the different flow properties of .
' concrete.

Or

(b) With,sketches explain thevariQUS specifications for' self compacting


concrete. " "

14. Ea) Explain the manufacturing prQcess apdcivil engg applications of steel.
Or
(b) , . Explain in detaIl about:
. (i), Aluminium composite'panel.·
HセI@
(ii)Distember
(4)
(iii) ,Paint.

15. (a), Ex.plain..:-Nゥョ、・エセャ。「ッオL@


.' -")"

\ (i).' Cerami(!s
. (8)
(ii) fゥ「イセァャ。ウ@ イ・ゥョヲッセ」、@ plastic.
(8)
,,"Or
(b) Describe.:: the :various. applications" of ',(i) Laminar
(ii)Geo textiles.

( GセB@ -. .

I .

,2 92\ of 238
Page
77060
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

CE6402
STRENGTH
OF
MATERIALS

Page 93 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

CE6402 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LT P C 3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES:

 To know the method of finding slope and deflection of beams and trusses using
energy theorems and to know the concept of analyzing indeterminate beam
 To estimate the load carrying capacity of columns, stresses due to unsymmetrical
bending and various theories for failure of material.

UNIT I ENERGY PRINCIPLES 9

Strain energy and strain energy density – strain energy due to axial load, shear, flexure
and torsion – Castigliano‟s theorems – Maxwell‟s reciprocal theorems - Principle of
virtual work – application of energy theorems for computing deflections in beams and
trusses - Williot Mohr's Diagram.

UNIT II INDETERMINATE BEAMS 9

Concept of Analysis - Propped cantilever and fixed beams-fixed end moments and
reactions – Theorem of three moments – analysis of continuous beams – shear force and
bending moment diagrams.

UNIT III COLUMNS AND CYLINDER 9

Euler‟s theory of long columns – critical loads for prismatic columns with different end
conditions; Rankine-Gordon formula for eccentrically loaded columns – Eccentrically
loaded short columns – middle third rule – core section – Thick cylinders – Compound
cylinders.

UNIT IV STATE OF STRESS IN THREE DIMENSIONS 9


Determination of principal stresses and principal planes – Volumetric strain –Theories
of failure – Principal stress - Principal strain – shear stress – Strain energy and
distortion energy theories – application in analysis of stress, load carrying capacity.

Page 94 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

UNIT V ADVANCED TOPICS IN BENDING OF BEAMS 9


Unsymmetrical bending of beams of symmetrical and unsymmetrical sections – Shear
Centre - curved beams – Winkler Bach formula.

TOTAL (L: 45+T: 15): 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

 Students will have through knowledge in analysis of indeterminate beams and


use of energy method for estimating the slope and deflections of beams and
trusses.

 They will be in a position to assess the behaviour of columns, beams and failure
of materials.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Rajput R.K. "Strength of Materials (Mechanics of Solids)", S.Chand & company Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2010.

. Egor P Popov, Engineering Mechanics of Solids , nd edition, P() Learning Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2012

REFERENCES:

. Kazimi S.M.A, Solid Mechanics , Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2003

. William A .Nash, Theory and Problems of Strength of Materials , Schaum‟s Outline


Series, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing company, 2007.

3. Punmia B.C."Theory of Structures" (SMTS) Vol 1&II, Laxmi Publishing Pvt Ltd, New
Delhi 2004.

4. Rattan.S.S., "Strength of Materials", Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi,2011

Page 95 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

COURSE INFORMATION SHEET

PROGRAMME : CIVIL ENGINEERING DEGREE : B.E YEAR OF STUDY


: 2016-2017
COURSE: STRENGTH OF MATERIALS SEMESTER: FOURTH CREDITS :
4
COURSE CODE : CE6402 REGULATION : COURSE TYPE : REGULAR
2013
COURSE AREA/DOMAIN : STRUCTURAL CONTACT HOURS: 3
ENGINEERING
CORRESPONDING LAB COURSE CODE: LAB COURSE NAME : STRENGTH
CE6411 OF MATERIALS LABORATORY

COURSE PRE-REQUISTIES
C.CODE COURSE NAME DESCRIPTION YEAR/SEM
CE6402 Mechanics Of Solids Knowledge about II/III
behaviour of members
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To know the method of finding slope and deflection of beams and trusses using
1.
energy theorems
2. To know the concept of analyzing indeterminate beam
3. To estimate the load carrying capacity of columns
4. To determine stresses due to unsymmetrical bending
5. To analyse various theories for failure of material

COURSE OUTCOMES
SNO DESCRIPTION
CO 1
Find the deflection in beams and frames using Energy theorems
CO 2 Analyse the strain energy stored in beams and columns.
Analyse indeterminate beams like continuous and fixed beams to compute
CO 3
SF,BMD,Monents
CO 4 Analyze the long and short columns and determine the design loads
CO 5 Assess the state of stress in three dimensions
CO 6 Solve problems involving unsymmetrical bending in structural members

Page 96 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Mapping Course Aims along with Course Final Results

Course
S.No. Course Objectives
Outcomes
1. To know the method of finding slope and deflection of CO 1, CO 2
beams and trusses using energy theorems
2. To know the concept of analyzing indeterminate beam CO 2, CO 3
3. To estimate the load carrying capacity of columns CO 4
4. To determine stresses due to unsymmetrical bending CO 6
5. To analyse various theories for failure of material CO 4

COURSE SPECIFIC OUTCOMES


S.No. Course Objectives
1. The students will be able to apply concepts from strength of materials to solve
variety of applied real – world engineering problems and discuss their ethical
Implications.
2. They will be able to apply appropriate computer software programs to derive
Solutions.
3. The students will be able to analyse the design concepts in co–relation to on
site conditions.

UNIT – I
ENERGY PRINCIPLES
2 Mark Questions
1. Define strain energy and Proof stress. (Nov/Dec 2009)
Strain energy
Whenever a body is strained, the energy is absorbed in the body. The energy which
is absorbed in the body due to straining effect is known as strain energy. The strain
energy stored in the body is equal to the work done by the applied load in stretching the
body
Proof stress
The stress induced in an elastic body when it possesses maximum strain energy is
termed as its proof stress.
2. Define Resilience, Proof Resilience and Modulus of Resilience. (May/Jun2012,
2015,2016).

Page 97 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Resilience: The resilience is defined as the capacity of a strained body for doing work
on the removal of the straining force. The total strain energy stored in a body is
commonly known as resilience.
Proof Resilience: The proof resilience is defined as the quantity of strain energy stored
in a body when strained up to elastic limit. The maximum strain energy stored in a body
is known as proof resilience.
Modulus of Resilience: It is defined as the proof resilience of a material per unit
volume. Proof resilience
Modulus of resilience = ------------------
Volume of the body
3. State the two methods for analyzing the statically indeterminate structures.
i. Displacement method (equilibrium method (or) stiffness coefficient method
ii. Force method (compatibility method (or) flexibility coefficient method)
4. Define Castigliano’s first theorem second Theorem.( May/Jun 2012,2016)
First Theorem: It states that the deflection caused by any external force is equal to
the partial derivative of the strain energy with respect to that force.
Second Theorem: )t states that )f U is the total strain energy stored up in a frame
work in equilibrium under an external force; its magnitude is always a minimum.
5. State the Principle of Virtual work. ( May/Jun 2013,2014,Nov/dec 2015)
It states that the work done on a structure by external loads is equal to the internal
energy stored in a structure (Ue = Ui) Work of external loads = work of internal loads
6. What is strain energy stored in a rod of length l and axial rigidity AE to an
axial force P?
Strain energy stored
P2 L
U= --------
2AE
7. State the various methods for computing the joint deflection of a perfect
frame.
1. The Unit Load method
2. Deflection by Castigliano’s First Theorem
3. Graphical method : Willot – Mohr Diagram

Page 98 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

8. State the deflection of the joint due to linear deformation.


n
δv = Σ U x ∆
1
n
δH = Σ U’ x ∆
1
PL
∆ = ---------
Ae
U= vertical deflection
U’= horizontal deflection
9. State the deflection of joint due to temperature variation.
n
δ=ΣUXA
1
= U1∆1 + U2 ∆2 + …………+ Un ∆n
)f the change in length ∆ of certain member is zero, the product U.∆ for those
members will be substituted as zero in the above equation.
10. State the deflection of a joint due to lack of fit.
n
δ= ΣU∆
1
= U1∆1 + U2 ∆2 + …………+ Un ∆n
)f there is only one member having lack of fit ∆1, the deflection of a particular joint will
be equal to U1∆1.
11. What is the effect of change in temperature in a particular member of a
redundant frame?
When any member of the redundant frame is subjected to a change in temperature, it
will cause a change in length of that particular member, which in turn will cause lack of
fit stresses in all other members of the redundant frame.
In the unit load method, one has to analyze the frame twice to find the load and
Deflection. While in the latter method, only one analysis is needed.

Page 99 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

12. State Maxwell’s Reciprocal Theorem.(May/Jun 2009, 2014,Nov/Dec 2013)


The Maxwell’s Reciprocal theorem states as The work done by the first system of
loads due to displacements caused by a second system of loads equals the work done by
the second system of loads due to displacements caused by the first system of loads.
13. Define degree of redundancy.
A frame is said to be statically indeterminate when the no of unknown reactions or
stress components exceed the total number of condition equations of equilibrium.
14. Define Perfect Frame.
If the number of unknowns is equal to the number of conditions equations available,
the frame is said to be a perfect frame.
15. State the two types of strain energies.
i. strain energy of distortion (shear strain energy)
ii. strain energy of uniform compression (or) tension (volumetric strain energy)
16. State in which cases, Castigliano’s theorem can be used.
1. To determine the displacements of complicated structures.
2. To find the deflection of beams due to shearing (or) bending forces (or)
bending moments are unknown.
3. To find the deflections of curved beams springs etc.
17. Define Proof stress.
The stress induced in an elastic body when it possesses maximum strain energy is
termed as its proof stress.
18. Denote complimentary energy with stress-strain curve.(Apr/may 2015).
Consider the stress strain diagram as shown Fig . The area enclosed by the inclined
line and the vertical axis is called the complementary strain energy. For linearly elastic
materials the complementary strain energy and elastic strain energy are the same.

16 Marks Questions
1. Calculate the central deflection and the slope at ends of a simply supported beam
carrying a UDL w/ unit length over the whole span. (May/Jun 2013, Nov/Dec 2013)

Page 100 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

2. Compare the strain energies of the following two shafts subjected to the same
maximum shear stress in torsion.
i A hollow shaft having outer diameter n’ times the inner diameter.
(ii) a solid shaft. (May/Jun 2016).
3. A beam simply supported over a span of 3m carries a udl of 20 kN/m over the entire
span. The flexural rigidity EI = 2.25 MNm 2. Using Castigliano’s theorem, determine the
deflection at the centre of the beam. (May/Jun 2013)
4. Find the strain energy stored in a steel bar of 50 cm long and or cross-section 5 cm x 1
cm whenit is subjected to axial pul of 60 kN and to a compressive stress of 120 N/mm 2
and on its narrow edges. Take E = 2 x 10 5 N/mm2 and 1/m = 0.29. What will be then the
modulus of resilience of the materials of the bar? ( Nov/Dec 2012)
5. A beam simply supported over a span of 3.5 m carries a UDL of 25 kN/m over the
entire span. Taking EI = 2.5 MNm2 and using Castigliano’s theorem, determine the
deflection at the centre of the beam. (Nov/Dec 2012)
6. Find the maximum deflection due to point load applied at the free end of elastic
cantilever beam of a rectangular cross section considering flexural and shearing
deformations.(May/Jun 2014)
7. Determine the vertical deflection at the free end of the cantilever truss shown in fig.
Take cross sectional area of the compression members as 850 mm 2 and tension
members as 1000 mm2. Modulus of elasticity, E = 210 GPa for all the members.
(May/Jun 2012)

8. (i)Derive a relation for strain energy due to torsion (ii)Derive a relation for maximum
reflection to cantilever beam carrying a point load W at free end. Use Castigliano’s
theorem. (May/June 2015).
9. A simply supported beam of span 3 m is carrying a point load of 18 kN at the mid
span. Determine the strain energy stored in the beam due to the horizontal shear. The

Page 101 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

beam is 80 mm wide and 100 mm deep. E = 200GN/m 2 and 1/m = 0.32. (May/June
2015).
UNIT – II
INDETERMINATE BEAMS
1. Define statically indeterminate beams.
If the numbers of reaction components are more than the conditions equations, the
structure is defined as statically indeterminate beams.
E=R–r
E = Degree of external redundancy
R = Total number of reaction components
r = Total number of condition equations available.
A continuous beam is a typical example of externally indeterminate structure.
2. State the degree of indeterminacy in propped cantilever.
For a general loading, the total reaction components (R) are equal to (3+2) =5,
While the total number of condition equations (r) are equal to 3. The beam is statically
indeterminate, externally to second degree. For vertical loading, the beam is statically
determinate to single degree.
E=R–r
=5–3=2
3. State the degree of indeterminacy in a fixed beam.
For a general system of loading, a fixed beam is statically indeterminate to third degree.
For vertical loading, a fixed beam is statically indeterminate to second degree.
E=R–r
For general system of loading:
R = 3 + 3 and r = 3
E = 6-3 = 3
For vertical loading:
R = 2+2 and r = 2
E=4–2=2
4. State the degree of indeterminacy in the given beam.
The beam is statically indeterminate to third degree of general system of loading.
R = 3+1+1+1 = 6
E = R-r = 6-3 = 3

Page 102 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

5. State the degree of indeterminacy in the given beam.


The beam is statically determinate. The total numbers of condition equations are
equal to 3+2 = 5. Since, there is a link at B. The two additional condition equations are at
link.
E = R-r = 2+1+2-5 = 5-5 = 0
6. State the methods available for analyzing statically indeterminate structures.
(May /June 2014)
i. Compatibility method
ii. Equilibrium method
7. Write the expression fixed end moments and deflection for a fixed beam
carrying point load at centre.
WL
MA  MB 
8
WL3
y max 
192 EI
8. Write the expression fixed end moments and deflection for a fixed beam
carrying eccentric point load.
Wab 2
MA 
L2
Wa 2 b
MB 
L2
Wa 3 b 3
y max  (under the load )
3EIL3
9. Write the expression fixed end moments for a fixed due to sinking of support.
6 EI
MA  MB 
L2

(i)The maximum bending moment in case of a continuous beam is much less than in
case of a simply supported beam of same span carrying same loads.
(ii) In case of a continuous beam, the average B.M is lesser and hence lighter
materials of construction can be used it resist the bending moment.
10. A fixed beam of length 5m carries a uniformly distributed load of 9 kN/m run
over the entire span. If I = 4.5x10-4 m4 and E = 1x107 kN/m2, find the fixing
moments at the ends and deflection at the centre.

Page 103 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Solution:
Given: L = 5m , W = 9 kN/m2 , I = 4.5x10-4 m4 and E = 1x107 kN/m2
(i) The fixed end moment for the beam carrying udl:
WL2 9 x(5) 2
MA = MB = =  18.75 KNm
12 12
(ii) The deflection at the centre due to udl:
WL4
yc 
384 EI
9 x(5) 4
yc   3.254 mm
384 x1x10 7 x 4.5 x10  4
Deflection is in downward direction.
11. A fixed beam AB, 6m long is carrying a point load of 40 kN at its center. The
M.O.I of the beam is 78 x 10 6 mm4 and value of E for beam material is 2.1x10 5
N/mm2. Determine (i) Fixed end moments at A and B.
Solution:

Fixed end moments:


WL 50 x6
MA  MB  MA  MB   37.5 kNm
8 8
12. A fixed beam AB of length 3m is having M.O.I I = 3 x 10 6 mm4 and value of E for
beam material is 2x105 N/mm2. The support B sinks down by 3mm. Determine
(i) fixed end moments at A and B.
Solution:
Given:
L = 3m = 3000mm
I = 3 x 106 mm4
E = 2x105 N/mm2
 = 3mm
6 EI 6 x 2 x10 5 x3x10 6 x3
MA  MB  = =12x105 N mm = 12 kN m.
L2 (3000) 2

13. A fixed beam AB, 3m long is carrying a point load of 45 kN at a distance of 2m


from A. If the flexural rigidity (i.e) EI of the beam is 1x10 4kNm2. Determine (i)
Deflection under the Load.

Page 104 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Solution:
Given:
L = 3m , W = 45 kN, EI = 1x104 kNm2
In fixed beam, deflection under the load due to eccentric load
Wa 3b 3
yC 
3EIL3

45 x(2) 3 x(1) 3
yC 
3x1x10 4 x(3) 2
y C  0.000444 m The deflection is in downward direction.
y C  0.444 mm

14. A fixed beam of 5m span carries a gradually varying load from zero at end A to
10 kN/m at end B. Find the fixing moment and reaction at the fixed ends.
Solution:
Given: L = 5m W = 10 kN/m

(i) Fixing Moment:


WL2 WL2
MA  and M B 
30 20

10(5) 2 250
MA =   8.33 kNm
30 30
10(5) 2 250
MB    12.5 kNm
20 20
(ii) Reaction at support:
3WL 7WL
RA  and RB 
20 20

3 * 10 * 5 150
RA    7.5 kN
20 20
7 * 10 * 5 350
RB    17.5 kN
20 20
15. A cantilever beam AB of span 6m is fixed at A and propped at B. The beam
carries a udl of 2kN/m over its whole length. Find the reaction at propped end.
Solution:
Given:

Page 105 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

L=6m, w =2 kN/m
Downward deflection at B due to the udl neglecting prop reaction P,
wl 4
yB 
8 EI
Upward deflection at B due to the prop reaction P at B neglecting the udl,
Pl 3
yB 
3EI
Upward deflection = Downward deflection
Pl 3 wl 4

3EI 8 EI
P = 3WL/8 = 3*2*6/8 =4.5 kN
16. A cantilever beam AB of span 6m is fixed at A and propped at B. The beam
carries a udl of 2kN/m over its whole length. Find the reaction at propped end.
Solution:
Given:
L=6m, w =2 kN/m
Downward deflection at B due to the udl neglecting prop reaction P,
wl 4
yB 
8 EI
Upward deflection at B due to the prop reaction P at B neglecting the udl,
Pl 3
yB 
3EI
Upward deflection = Downward deflection
Pl 3 wl 4

3EI 8 EI
P = 3WL/8 = 3*2*6/8 =4.5 kN
21. Define: Continuous beam.
A Continuous beam is one, which is supported on more than two supports.
For usual loading on the beam hogging (- ive ) moments causing convexity upwards
at the supports and sagging ( + ve ) moments causing concavity upwards occur at mid
span.
22. What are the advantages of Continuous beam over simply supported beam?
1. The maximum bending moment in case of continuous beam is much less than in case
of simply supported beam of same span carrying same loads.

Page 106 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

2. In case of continuous beam, the average bending moment is lesser and hence lighter
materials of construction can be used to resist the bending moment.
23. Give the procedure for analyzing the continuous beams with fixed ends
using three moment equations?
The three moment equations, for the fixed end of the beam, can be
modified by imagining a span of length l 0 and moment of inertia, beyond the
support the and applying the theorem of three moments as usual.
24. Define Flexural Rigidity of Beams.
The product of young’ s modulus (E) and moment of inertia (I) is called Flexural
Rigidity (EI) of Beams. The unit is N mm2.
25. What is a fixed beam? (April/May 2011,2016).
A beam whose both ends are fixed is known as a fixed beam. Fixed beam is
also called as built-in or encaster beam. Incase of fixed beam both its ends are
rigidly fixed and the slope and deflection at the fixed ends are zero.
26. What are the advantages of fixed beams? (May/June 2014).
(i)For the same loading, the maximum deflection of a fixed beam is less than
that of a simply supported beam.
(ii)For the same loading, the fixed beam is subjected to lesser maximum
bending moment.
(iii)The slope at both ends of a fixed beam is zero.
(iv)The beam is more stable and stronger.
27. What are the disadvantages of a fixed beam?
(i)Large stresses are set up by temperature changes.
(ii)Special care has to be taken in aligning supports accurately at the same lavel.
(iii)Large stresses are set if a little sinking of one support takes place.
(iv)Frequent fluctuations in loading render the degree of fixity at the ends very
uncertain.
28. Explain with examples the statically indeterminate structures.
If the forces on the members of a structure cannot be determined by using
conditions of equilibrium (∑Fx = , ∑Fy = 0, ∑M = , it is ca ed statica 1y indeterminate
structures. Example: Fixed beam, continuous beam

Page 107 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

29. Differentiate the statically determinate structures and statically


indeterminate structures?
S.No. Statically determinate Statically Indeterminate
structures
1 Conditions of equilibrium are Conditions of equilibrium are
sufficient to analyze the structure insufficient to analyze the
structure
2 Bending moment and shear force Bending moment and shear
is independent of material and force is independent of material
cross sectional area. and cross sectional area.

3 No stresses are caused due Stresses are caused due to


to temperature change and lack of fit. temperature change and lack of fit.

30. What are the advantages and limitations of three moment’s theorem? (May/June
2012).
31. State Muller- Breslau principle. (Nov/Dec 2011).
The Müller Breslau Principle states that the ordinate value of an influence line for any
function on any structure is proportional to the ordinates of the deflected shape that is
obtained by removing the restraint corresponding to the function from the structure and
introducing a force that causes a unit displacement in the positive direction.
32. What is meant by a prop? (Nov/Dec 2011).
A pole or beam used as a temporary support or to keep something in position
33. Draw the elastic curve for a fixed beam of length l carrying a central point
load W. (May/june 2015)

16 Marks Questions
1. A fixed beam AB of length 6m carries point load of 160 kN and 120 kN at a distance of
2m and 4m from the left end A. Find the fixed end moments and the reactions at the
supports. Draw B.M and S.F diagrams. (may/june 2015,2016)

Page 108 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

2. A fixed beam of 8m length is loaded with equal point loads of 130 kN each at a
distance 3 m from each support . Draw the bending moment and shear force diagram
where E = 2 x 108 kN/m2, I = 8 x 108 mm4 (Nov/Dec 2013).
3. A continuous beam ABCD of length 15m rests on four supports covering 3 equal
spans and carries a uniformly distributed load of 1.5 kN/m length .Calculate the
moments and reactions at the supports. Draw the S.F.D and B.M.D.
4. A cantilever of length L carries a concentrated load W at the mid-span if the free end is
supported on a rigid prop. Find the reaction at the prop. Also draw shear force and
bending moment diagrams. (May/June 2014).
5. A continuous beam ABC, is loaded as shown in fig. Find the support moments using
three moment equation. Draw SFD and BMD. (Nov/Dec 2011).

6. A propped cantilever beam of span 6 m is subjected to a u.d.l of 2 kN/m over a length


of 4 m from the fixed end. Determine the prop reaction and draw the shear force and
bending moment diagrams. (May/June 2012).
7 . A cantilever ABC is fixed at A and propped at C is loaded with u.d.l of 10 kN/m over a
span of 4 m from the fixed end. The total length of the beam is 6 m. Find the reaction at C.
(May/June 2013)
8. A continuous beam ABC of uniform section, with span AB, and BC as 4 m each, is fixed
at A and simply supported at B and C . The beam is carrying an UDL of 6kN/m run
throughout its length. Find the support moments and the reaction. Also draw SFD and
BMD. (may/june 2015)
9. Draw SFD and BMD for the given beam. (may/june 2016)

Page 109 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

UNIT III

COLUMNS AND CYLINDER

1. Define columns
If the member of the structure is vertical and both of its ends are fixed rigidly
while subjected to axial compressive load, the member is known as column.
Example: A vertical pillar between the roof and floor.
2. Define struts.
If the member of the structure is not vertical and one (or) both of its ends is
Linged (or) pin jointed, the bar is known as strut.
Example: Connecting rods, piston rods etc,
3. Mention the stresses which are responsible for column failure.
i. Direct compressive stresses
ii. Buckling stresses
iii. Combined of direct compressive and buckling stresses.
4. State the assumptions made in the Euler’s column theory.
1. The column is initially perfectly straight and the load is applied axially.
2. The cross-section of the column is uniform throughout its length.
3. The column material is perfectly elastic, homogeneous and isotropic and obeys
(ooke’s law.
4. The self weight of column is negligible.
5. What are the important end conditions of columns?
1. Both the ends of the column are hinged (or pinned)
2. One end is fixed and the other end is free.
3. Both the ends of the column are fixed.
4. One end is fixed and the other is pinned.

6. Write the expression for crippling load when the both ends of the column are
hinged.

 2 EI
P 2
l
P = Crippling load , E = Young’s Modulus, ) = Moment of inertia,
l = Length of column

Page 110 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

7. Write the expression for buckling load (or) Crippling load when both ends of
the column are fixed?

4 2 EI
P
L2
P = Crippling load, E = Young’s Modulus, ) = Moment of inertia, l = Length of
column
8. Write the expression for crippling load when column with one end fixed and
other end hinged.

2 2 EI
P
l2
P = Crippling load, E = Young’s Modulus, ) = Moment of inertia, l = Length of column
9. Write the expression for buckling load for the column with one fixed and
other end free.

 2 EI
P
4l 2
10. Explain equivalent length (or) Effective length.(Nov/dec 2015).
If l is actual length of a column, then its equivalent length (or) effective length L
may be obtained by multiplying it with some constant factor C, which depends on the
end fixation of the column (ie) L = C x l.
11. Write the Equivalent length (L) of the column in which both ends hinged and
write the crippling load.

 2 EI
Crippling Load P
L2
Equivalent length (L) = Actual length (l)
12. Write the relation between Equivalent length and actual length for all end
conditions of column.
Both ends linged L=l Constant = 1
l 1
Both ends fixed L Constant =
2 2

One end fixed and other l 1


L Constant =
end hinged 2 2

One end fixed and other


L  2l Constant = 2
end free

Page 111 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

13. Define core (or) Kernel of a section. (April/May 2003, 2010,May/Jun 2012)
When a load acts in such a way on a region around the CG of the section So that
in that region stress everywhere is compressive and no tension is developed anywhere,
then that area is called the core (or) Kernal of a section. The kernel of the section is the
area within which the line of action of the eccentric load P must cut the cross-section if
the stress is not to become tensile.
14. Define Slenderness ratio.
It is defined as the ratio of the effective length of the column (L) to the least radius of
L
gyration of its cross –section (K) (i.e) the ratio of is known as slenderness ratio.
K
L
Slenderness ratio =
K
15. State the Limitations of Euler’s formula.(April /May 2005)
a. Euler’s formula is applicable when the slenderness ratio is greater than or
equal to 80
b. Euler’s formula is applicable only for long column
c. Euler’s formula is thus unsuitable when the slenderness ratio is less than a
certain value.
16. Write the Rankine’s formula for columns. .(April /May 2010)
fc  A
P 2
L
1 
K

I
K = Least radius of gyration 
A

P = Crippling load
A = Area of the column
fc = Constant value depends upon the material.
fc
 = Rankine’s constant 
 2E
17. Write the Rankine’s formula for eccentric column. .(April /May 2010)

fc  A
P
eyc    L 
2

1  2  1     
 k    k  

Page 112 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

I
K = Least radius of gyration 
A

P = Crippling load
A = Area of the column
fc = Constant value depends upon the material.
fc
 = Rankine’s constant 
 2E
18. Define thick cylinder. (April /May 2011)
If the ratio of thickness of the internal diameter of a cylindrical or spherical shell
exceeds 1/20, it is termed as a thick shell.
The hoop stress developed in a thick shell varies from a maximum value at the inner
circumference to a minimum value at the outer circumference. Thickness > 1/20
22. State the assumptions involved in Lame’s Theory(Nov/Dec 2015)
i. The material of the shell is Homogeneous and isotropic.
ii. Plane section normal to the longitudinal axis of the cylinder remains
plane after the application of internal pressure.
iii. All the fibers of the material expand (or) contact independently without
being constrained by there adjacent fibers.
23. What is the middle third rule? (Nov/Dec 2003)
)n rectangular sections, the eccentricity e’ must be less than or equal to b/ .
Hence the greatest eccentricity of the load is b/6 form the axis Y-Y and with respect to
axis X –X1 the eccentricity does not exceed d/6. Hence the load may be applied with in
the middle third of the base (or) Middle d/3.
24. Differentiate short and long column
Short column Long column
1. It is subjected to direct compressive 1. It is subjected to buckling stress only.
stresses only.
2. Failure occurs purely due to crushing 2. Failure occurs purely due to bucking
only. only.
3. Slenderness ratio is less than 80 3. Slenderness ratio is more than 120.
4.It’ s length to least lateral dimension 4. It’ s length to least lateral dimension
is less han 8. ( L / D 8 is more than 30. ( L / D )

Page 113 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

26. Define crippling load. (May/june 2015)


27. Draw a qualitative stress and pressure diagram across the cross section of a
thick cylinder subjected to internal pressure. (May/june 2015)

16 MARKS QUESTIONS
6. (i) State the assumptions made in the Euler’s theorem.
(ii)Derive the expression for buckling load for the column with one end fixed and
Other end free.(April/May 2003,May/Jun 2012)
7. A hollow cylindrical cast iron column whose external diameter is 200 mm and has a
thickness of 20 mm is 4.5 m long and is fixed at both ends. Calculate the safe load by
Rankine’s formula using a factor of safety as . . Take crushing strength of material as
550 N/mm2 and Rankine’s constant as / . F ind also the ratio of Euler’s to
Rankine’s load. Take E = 150GPa. (May/Jun 2012)
8. A pipe of 200mm internal diameter and 50 mm thickness carries a fluid at a pressure
of 10 MPa. Calculate the maximum and minimum intensities of circumferential stress
across the section. Also sketch the radial stress distribution and circumferential stress
distribution across the section. (Apr/may 2011)
9. Derive the expression for crippling load of a column with one end fixed and other end
free(Apr/may 2016).
10. Calculate the Euler’s critical load for a strut of T- section. The flange width is 100
mm, overall depth is 80 mm, and both flange and stem are 10 mm thick. The strut is 3m
long and is built in at both ends. Take E = 2x105 N/mm2 (Apr/may 2015).
11. A column of circular section is subjected to a load of 120 kN. The load is parallel to
the axis but eccentric by an amount of 2.5 mm. The external and internal diameters are
60 mm and 50 mm respectively. If both the ends of the column are hinged and column is
2.1 m long determine the maximum stress in the column. Take E = 200 GN/ m2
(Apr/may 2015).

Page 114 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

UNIT – IV
STATE OF STRESS IN THREE DIMENSIONS
1. Define stress
When a certain system of external forces acts on a body then the body offers resistance
to these forces. This internal resistance offered by the body per unit area is called the
stress induced in the body.
2. Define principal planes. (APRIL/MAY 2010, 2016)
The plane in which the shear stress is zero is called principal planes. The plane
which is independent of shear stress is known as principal plane.
3. Define spherical tensor.
 m 0 0 

 ijii  0  m 0 
0 0  m 

It is also known as hydrostatic stress tensor

m 
1
 x   y   z 
3
 m is the mean stress.

4. Define Deviator stress tensor

 x   m l xy   xz 
  
 ij1   xy  y   m   yz 
    
 xz l yz  z m

5. Define volumetric strain


It is defined as the ratio between change in volume and original volume of the
body and is denoted by e v

Change in volume v
ev =
Original volume v

6. State the principal theories of failure.


1. Maximum principal stress theory
2. Maximum shear stress (or) stress difference theory
3. Strain energy theory
4. Shear strain energy theory

Page 115 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

5. Maximum principal strain theory


6. Mohr’s Theory
7. State the Limitations of Maximum principal stress theory
1. On a mild steel specimen when spiel tension test is carried out sliding occurs
approximately 45o to the axis of the specimen; this shows that the failure in
this case is due to maximum shear stress rather than the direct tensile stress.
2. It has been found that a material which is even though weak in simple
compression yet can sustain hydrostatic pressure for in excess of the elastic
limit in simple compression.
8. Explain maximum principal stress theory.
According to this theory failure will occur when the maximum principle tensile
stress (1) in the complex system reaches the value of the maximum stress at the elastic
limit (et) in the simple tension.
9. Define maximum shear stress theory
This theory implies that failure will occur when the maximum shear stress 
maximum in the complex system reaches the value of the maximum shear stress in simple
tension at elastic limit (i.e)
1  3  et
l max   (or)  1   3   et
2 2
10. State the limitations of maximum shear stress theory.
i. The theory does not give accurate results for the state of stress of pure shear
in which the maximum amount of shear is developed (i.e) Torsion test.
ii. The theory does not give us close results as found by experiments on ductile
materials. However, it gives safe results.

11. Explain shear strain Energy theory.


This theory is also called Distortion energy Theory or Von Mises - (enky Theory.
According to this theory the elastic failure occurs where the shear strain energy per unit
volume in the stressed material reaches a value equal to the shear strain energy per unit
volume at the elastic limit point in the simple tension test.
12. State the limitations of Distortion energy theory. ( May/Jun 2012)
1. The theory does to agree the experiment results for the material for which
 at is quite different etc.

Page 116 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

2. This theory is regarded as one to which conform most of the ductile material
under the action of various types of loading.
13. Explain Maximum principal strain theory
The theory states that the failure of a material occurs when the principal tensile strain
in the material reaches the strain at the elastic limit in simple tension (or) when the min
minimum principal strain (ie ) maximum principal compressive strain reaches the
elastic limit in simple compression.
14. State the Limitations in maximum principal strain theory
i. The theory overestimates the behaviour of ductile materials.
ii. The theory does no fit well with the experimental results except for brittle
materials for biaxial tension.
15. State the stress tensor in Cartesian components

 x .   xz 

 ij'   xy   yz 
xy

y
 
 xz  yz  z 
16. Explain the three stress invariants. ( May /June 2012)
The principal stresses are the roots of the cubic equation,
 3  I 1 2  I 2  I 3  0 , where
I1   x   y   z

I 2    y   y z   x z   2 xy  y 2 z   2 xz

I 3   x  y Z   x 2 xy   y 2 xz   z 2 xy  2 xy yz xz
17. State the two types of strain energy
i. Strain energy of distortion (shear strain energy)
ii. Strain energy of dilatation.
18. Explain Mohr’s Theory

Let   f  
The enveloping curve   f   must represent in this abscissa  and ordinates
e, the normal and shearing stresses in the plane of slip.

Page 117 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

2 2
  3    3 
  1   2   1 
 2   2 

Let P 
1
 1   3  , m 
1
 1   3 
2 2

  p    2  lm 2
2

19. State the total strain energy theory.


The total strain energy of deformation is given by

 
1  2 
U  1   22   32  2v 1 2   2 3   3 1 
2E
 
 
and strain energy in simple tension is

 02
U
2E
20. State the shear strain energy per unit volume
 
 2
 1   2    2   3    3   1  
1
s 2 2
12C  
 

E
where C 
 1
21  
 m
21. Explain the concept of stress?
When certain system of external forces acts on a body then the body offers
resistance to these forces. This internal resistance offered by the body per unit area is
called the stress induced in the body.
The stress  may be resolved into two components. The first one is the normal
stress n, which is the perpendicular to the section under examination and the second
one is the shear stress  , which is operating in the plane of the section.
22. State the Theories of failure.
The principal theories are:
1. Maximum principal stress theory

Page 118 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

2. Maximum shear stress (or) stress difference theory


3. Strain energy theory
4. Shear strain energy theory
5. Maximum principal strain theory
6. Mohr’s Theory
23. What is a stress Tensor? (Apr /May 2015, 2016).
In continuum mechanics, the Cauchy stress tensor , true stress tensor or
simply called the stress tensor, named after Augustin-Louis Cauchy, is a second order
tensor of type (1,1) (that is, a linear map), with nine components that completely
define the state of stress at a point inside a material in the deformed placement or
configuration. The tensor relates a unit-length direction vector n to the stress vector T(n)
across an imaginary surface perpendicular to n:

where,

24. What is meant by strain energy? (Apr /May 2015).


Strain Energy of the member is defined as the internal work done in deforming the
body by the action of externally applied forces. This energy in elastic bodies is known as
elastic strain energy
25. State Maxwel’s reciprocal theorem. (Apr /May 2010, 2011, Nov/Dec 2010).
The displacement of a point B on a structure due to a unit load acting at point A is
equal to the displacement of point A when the unit load is acting at point B, that is, fBA = fAB.
26. State the principal of virtual work. (Apr /May 2011)
The principle stating that the total virtual work done by all the forces acting on a
system in static equilibrium is zero for a set of infinitesimal virtual displacements from
equilibrium. The infinitesimal displacements are called virtual because they need not be
obtained by a displacement that actually occurs in the system. The virtual work is the
work done by the virtual displacements, which can be arbitrary, provided they are
consistent with the constraints of the system.

Page 119 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

16 Marks Questions
1. Explain the Energy of Distortion (shear strain energy) and Dilatation
2. Explain the Maximum Principal stress Theory: Rankine’s Theory)
3. Explain the Maximum shear stress (or) Stress Difference theory (April /May 2003)
4. Explain the Shear strain Energy Theory (April / May 2003)
5. Explain the Maximum principal strain Theory?
. Explain Mohr’s Theory?
7. In a steel member, at a point the major principal stress is 180 MN/m 2 and the Minor
principal stresses is compressive. If the tensile yield point of the steel is 225 MN/m2,
find the value of the minor principal stress at which yielding will commence,
according to each of the following criteria of failure.
i. Maximum shearing stress
ii. Maximum total strain energy
iii. Maximum shear strain energy
Take Poisson’s ratio = . (May/June 2012)
8. In a material the principal stresses are 60 MN/m 2, 48 MN/m2 and - 36 MN/m2.
Calculate
i. Total strain energy
ii. Volumetric strain energy
iii. Shear strain energy
iv. Factor of safety on the total strain energy criteria if the
material yields at 120 MN/m2.
Take E = 200 GN/m2+ and 1/m = 0.3
9. In a material the principal stresses are 50 N/mm 2, 40 N/mm2 and - 30 N/mm2,
calculate:
i. Total strain energy
ii. Volumetric strain energy
iii. Shear strain energy and
iv. Factor of safety on the total strain energy criterion if the material
yield at 100 N/mm2.
Take E = 200 x 103 N/mm2 and Poisson ratio = 0 .28
10. In a material the principal stresses are 50 N/mm2, 40 N/mm2 and - 30 N/mm2,
calculate:

Page 120 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

1. Total strain energy


2. Volumetric strain energy
3. Shear strain energy and
4. Factor of safety on the total strain energy criterion if the material yields at
100 N/mm2.
Take E = 200 x 103 N/mm2 and Poisson ratio = 0 .2
11. A beam of rectangular section 75 mm wide and 125 mm deep is subjected to
bending moment of 15 kNm. The Trace of the plane of loading is inclined at 15 degree to
Yy axis of the section. Locate the neutral axis of the section and calculate the maximum
bending stress induced in the section. (Nov / Dec 2012)
12. Determine the principal stresses and principal directions for the following 3D
stress field (May/June 2015)

13. According to the theory of maximum shear stress , determine the diameter of a bolt
which is subjected to an axial pull of 9kN together with a transverse shear force of 4.5
kN. Elastic limit in tension is 225 N/mm2 , factor of safety = and Poisson’s ratio = . .
(May/June 2015)
UNIT – V
ADVANCED TOPICS IN BENDING OF BEAMS
1. Define Unsymmetrical bending (May/June 2015)
The plane of loading (or) that of bending does not lie in (or) a plane that contains the
principle centroidal axis of the cross- section; the bending is called Unsymmetrical
bending.
2. State the two reasons for unsymmetrical bending. (May/ Jun 2014, April/May
2011, 2016)
(i) The section is symmetrical (viz. Rectangular, circular, I section) but the load
line is inclined to both the principal axes.
(ii) The section is unsymmetrical (viz. Angle section (or) channel section vertical
web) and the load line is along any centroidal axes.

Page 121 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

3. Define shear centre. (Nov/ Dec 2012)


The shear centre (for any transverse section of the beam) is the point of
intersection of the bending axis and the plane of the transverse section. Shear centre is
also known as centre of twist
4. Write the shear centre equation for channel section. (Nov/ Dec 2012)
3b
e
A
6 w
Af

e = Distance of the shear centre (SC ) from the web along the symmetric
axis XX
Aw = Area of the web
Af = Area of the flange
5. A channel Section has flanges 12 cm x 2 cm and web 16 cm x 1 cm. Determine
the shear centre of the channel.
Solution:
b= 12-0.5 = 11.5 cm
t1 = 2cm, t2 = 1cm, h= 18 cm
Af = bt1 = 11.5 x 2 = 23 cm2
Aw = ht2 = 18 x 1= 18 cm2
3b 3(11 .5)
e e  5.086 cm
Aw 18
6 6
Af 23

6. Write the shear centre equation for unsymmetrical I section.


t1 h 2 (b2  b1 ) 2
e
4I xx

e = Distance of the shear centre (SC) from the web along the symmetric
axis XX
t1 = thickness of the flange
h = height of the web
b1 = width of the flange in right portion.
b2 = width of the flange in left portion.
Ixx = M.O.I of the section about XX axis.
7. State the assumptions made in Winkler’s Bach Theory. (May/ Jun 2014, 2012,
2016)

Page 122 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

(1) Plane sections (transverse) remain plane during bending.


The material obeys (ooke’s law limit state of proportionality is not
exceeded)
(3) Radial strain is negligible.
(4) The fibres are free to expand (or) contract without any constraining effect
from the adjacent fibres.
8. State the parallel Axes and Principal Moment of inertia.
If the two axes about which the product of inertia is found, are such , that the
product of inertia becomes zero, the two axes are then called the principle axes. The
moment of inertia about a principal axes is called the principal moment of inertia.
9. Define stress concentration.
The term stress gradient is used to indicate the rate of increase of stress as a
stress raiser is approached. These localized stresses are called stress concentration.
10. Define stress – concentration factor.
It is defined as the ratio of the maximum stress to the nominal stress.
 max
Kt 
 nom

 max = maximum stress


 nom = nominal stress
11. Define fatigue stress concentration factor.
The fatigue stress – concentration factor (Kf ) is defined as the ratio of flange
limit of unnotched specimen to the fatigue limit of notched specimen under axial (or)
bending loads.
K f  1  q( K t  1)

Value of q ranges from zero to one.


12. Define shear flow.
Shear flow is defined as the ratio of horizontal shear force H over length of the
beam x. Shear flow is acting along the longitudinal surface located at discharge y 1.Shear
flow is defined by q.
H Q
q  Vy z
x Iz

H = horizontal shear force

Page 123 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

13. Explain the position of shear centre in various sections.


(i) In case of a beam having two axes of symmetry, the shear centre coincides
with the centroid.
(ii) In case of sections having one axis of symmetry, the shear centre does not
coincide with the centroid but lies on the axis of symmetry.
14. State the principles involved in locating the shear centre.
The principle involved in locating the shear centre for a cross – section of a beam
is that the loads acting on the beam must lie in a plane which contains the resultant
shear force on each cross-section of the beam as computed from the shearing stresses.
15. Determine the position of shear centre of the section of the beam shown in fig.
Solution:
t1 = 4 cm, b1 = 6 cm, b2 = 8 cm
h1 = 30 – 4 = 26 cm

t1 h 2 (b2  b1 ) 2
e
4I xx

14 x4 3  2 x22 3
Ixx = 2  14 x4(13) 3    20852 cm 4
 12  12

4 x26 2 (8  6) 2
e  0.9077 cm
4(20852

16. State the stresses due to unsymmetrical bending.


 v cos u sin  
b  M  
 I UU I VV 

σb = bending stress in the curved bar


M = moment due to the load applied
IUU = Principal moment of inertia in the principal axes UU
IVV = Principal moment of inertia in the principal axes V
17. Define the term Fatigue. (May/ Jun 2013, 2015)
Fatigue is defined as the failure of a material under varying loads, well below the
ultimate static load, after a finite number of cycles of loading and unloading.
18. State the types of fatigue stress.
(i) Direct stress
(ii) Plane bending

Page 124 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

(iii) Rotating bending


(iv) Torsion
v) Combined stresses
(a) Fluctuating or alternating stress
(b) Reversed stress.
19. State the reasons for stress- concentration. (May/ Jun 2013)
When a large stress gradient occurs in a small, localized area of a structure, the
high stress is referred to as a stress concentration. The reasons for stress concentration
are (i) discontinuities in continuum (ii) contact forces.
20. Define creep.
Creep can be defined as the slow and progressive deformation of a material with
time under a constant stress.
16 Marks Questions
1. Explain the stresses induced due to unsymmetrical bending.
2. Derive the equation of Shear centre for channel section. (April/May 2005)
3. Determine the shear centre for a channel section of 400 mm by 200 mm outside and 5
mm thick. (May/ June 2015).
4. A simply supported beam of span 3 m carries a load of 500 N at its centre. The section
of the beam is an Equal angle of size 100 mm by 100 mm and 12.5 mm thick ( one leg is
in horizontal position). The load line passes through the centroid of the section.
Determine the deflection at the mid section and the position of central axis . Take E=
2x105 N/mm2 (May/ June 2015).
5.A steel ring has a rectangular cross-section , 75 mm in the radial direction and 45 mm
perpendicular to the radial direction. If the mean radius of the ring is 150 mm and
maximum tensile stress is limited to 180 MN/m 2 , calculate the tensile load the ring
carry. (May/ June 2016).

Page 125 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 126 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 127 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 128 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 129 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 130 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 131 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 132 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 133 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 134 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 135 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

CE 6403
APPLIED
HYDRAULIC
ENGINEERING

Page 136 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

CE 6403 APPLIED HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING


OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the students to various hydraulic engineering problems like
open channel flows and hydraulic machines. At the completion of the course,
the student should be able to relate the theory and practice of problems in
hydraulic engineering.

UNIT I UNIFORM FLOW


Definition and differences between pipe flow and open channel flow - Types of
Flow - Properties of open channel - Fundamental equations - Velocity
distribution in open channel - Steady uniform flow: Chezy equation, Manning
equation - Best hydraulic sections for uniform flow - Computation in Uniform
Flow - Specific energy and specific force - Critical depth and velocity.
UNIT II GRADUALLY V ARIED FLOW
Dynamic equations of gradually varied and spatially varied flows - Water
surface flow profile classifications: Hydraulic Slope, Hydraulic Curve - Profile
determination by Numerical method: Direct step method and Standard step
method, Graphical method - Applications.
UNIT III RAPIDLY VARIED FLOW
Application of the energy equation for RVF - Critical depth and velocity -
Critical, Sub-critical and Super-critical flow - Application of the momentum
equation for RVF - Hydraulic jumps - Types - Energy dissipation - Surges and
surge through channel transitions.
UNIT IV TURBINES
Impact of Jet on vanes - Turbines - Classification - Reaction turbines - Francis
turbine, Radial flow turbines, draft tube and cavitation - Propeller and Kaplan

Page 137 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

turbines - Impulse turbine - Performance of turbine - Specific speed -


Runaway speed - Similarity laws.
UNIT V PUMPS
Centrifugal pumps - Minimum speed to start the pump - NPSH - Cavitations in
pumps - Operating characteristics - Multistage pumps - Reciprocating pumps -
Negative slip - Flow separation conditions - Air vessels, indicator diagrams
and its variations - Savings in work done - Rotary pumps: Gear pump.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain. A.K., "Fluid Mechanics", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2010.
2. Modi P.N. and Seth S.M., "Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics", Standard Book
House, New Delhi, 2002.
3. Subramanya K., "Flow in open channels", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2000.
REFERENCES:
1. Ven Te Chow, "Open Channel Hydraulics", McGraw Hill, New York, 2009.
2. Rajesh Srivastava, "Flow through open channels", Oxford University Press,
New Delhi, 2008.
3. Bansal, "Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines", Laxmi Publications,
New Delhi, 2008.
4. Mays L. W "Water Resources Engineering", John Wiley and Sons (WSE),
New York, 2005

Page 138 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

PANIMALAR ENGINEERING COLLEGE


DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
COURSE INFORMATION SHEET

PROGRAMME : CIVIL ENGINEERING DEGREE : B.E YEAR OF STUDY :


2016-2017
COURSE: APPLIED HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING SEMESTER: FOURTH,CREDITS : 4
COURSE CODE : CE 6403 REGULATION : 2013 COURSE TYPE : CORE
COURSE AREA/DOMAIN : HYDRAULIC CONTACT HOURS: 4
ENGINEERING
CORRESPONDING LAB COURSE CODE: CE6412 LAB COURSE NAME : HYDRAULIC
ENGINEERING LABORATORY

COURSE PRE-REQUISTIES
C.CODE COURSE NAME DESCRIPTION YEAR/SEM
CE6303 FLUID MECHANICS Basic application of fluids II/III
mechanics

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To explain the basics concepts of uniform flow

2. To give the importance of the variation of uniform flow - GVF

3. To give the importance of the variation of uniform flow - RVF

4. To explain the various types of turbines and its working principles

5. To explain the various types of pumps and its working principles

COURSE OUTCOMES
SNO DESCRIPTION
CO 1 To apply their knowledge of fluid mechanics in addressing problems in open channels
CO 2 To solve problems in uniform flow – GVF in steady state conditions
CO 3 To solve problems in uniform flow – RVF in steady state conditions
CO 4 To obtain knowledge in hydraulic machineries - turbines
CO 5 To obtain knowledge in hydraulic machineries - pumps

COURSE SPECIFIC OUTCOMES


SNO DESCRIPTION
CSO 1 To gain the basic knowledge of fluid mechanics in open channels
CSO 2 To solve the problems on various flow pattern of uniform flow in GVF and RVF
CSO 3 To obtain the knowledge in hydraulic machineries in terms of turbines and pumps

Page 139 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Mapping Course Aims along with Course Final Results

Course Course specific


S.No. Course Objectives
Outcomes outcomes
1. To explain the basics concepts of uniform
CO1 CSO 1
flow
2. To give the importance of the variation of
CO1,CO2 CSO 1, CSO 2
uniform flow - GVF
3. To give the importance of the variation of
CO1,CO3 CSO 1, CSO 2
uniform flow - RVF
4. To explain the various types of turbines
CO1, CO4 CSO 1, CSO 3
and its working principles
5. To explain the various types of pumps
CO1,CO5 CSO 1, CSO 3
and its working principles

Page 140 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

UNIT I - OPEN CHANNEL FLOW


TWO MARK QUESTIONS

1. Define open channel flow with examples. (May 2010, 2013, 2014)
Flow of liquid with a free surface (i.e., surface exposed to atmosphere) through any
passage is known as open channel flow. The liquid flowing through any closed passage
without touching the top can also treated as open channels.
Examples:
1. Flow in natural waterfalls, river and streams
2. Flow in artificial or man-made channels such as irrigation channels and flumes.
3. Closed conduit or pipe carries liquid partially (sewers that carry domestic or
industrial waste water). Generally, liquid flowing in open channel in water.

2. Explain laminar and turbulent flow.


Laminar flow:
If Reynolds number of flow is less than 500, it is called as Laminer flow. The value of
Reynolds number is between 500 and 2000, the flow is transitional.
Turbulent flow:
For values of Reynolds number greater than 2000, the flow is turbulent.

3. What are the various types of flow in open channels? (May 2012)
The flow in open channel is classified into the following types:
 Steady and unsteady flow
 Uniform and non- uniform flow
 Laminar and turbulent flow
 Subcritical, critical and supercritical flow.

4. Define the term uniform flow. (May 2011)


 If the depth of flow, slope of the bed of channel and cross section remain
 Constant with respect to distance is called uniform flow.

5. Define non uniform flow. (May 2011)


Flow properties, such as depth of flow, velocity of flow are not constant with
Page 141 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

respect to distance is called non uniform flow.

6. Distinguish between steady and unsteady flow.


In steady flow, various characteristics of flowing fluids such as velocity, pressure,
density, temperature etc. at a point do not change with time. In other words, a
steady flow may be defined as that in which the various characteristics are
independent of time. Mathematically it can be expressed as

In unsteady flow, various characteristics of flowing fluids such as velocity,


pressure, density, etc. at a point change with respect to time. Mathematically,

Unsteadiness refers to the change of flow pattern with the passage of time at a
position in the flow

7. Explain the terms: (i) Gradually varied flow and (ii) Rapidly varied flow.
Gradually varied flow
If the depth of flow changes gradually over a long length of the channel, the
flow is said to gradually varied flow (GVF).

Rapidly varied flow


If the depth of flow changes rapidly over a small length of the channel, the flow is

Page 142 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

said to be rapidly varied flow.

8. Write down the formula for Froude number.

9. Define hydraulic mean depth. (Nov


2012)

10. Define specific energy. [Anna Univ. May2011, 2012 , 2015]


Specific energy of a flowing liquid is defined as energy per unit weight of a
liquid with respect to the bottom of the channel. By a symbol E.

11. Define critical flow. (May 2014)


Depth of flow of water at which the specific energy. E is minimum is called as critical
depth (yc)
For rectangular channel, critical depth,
Page 143 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

12. Define critical velocity.


Velocity of flow at the critical depth is called critical velocity Vc

13. Distinguish between critical, sub critical and super critical flows.
Critical flow:
Depth of flow of water at which the specific energy is minimum is called as
critical flow. Otherwise, flow corresponding to critical depth is called as critical
flow. F=1

Sub critical flow:


When the depth of flow in a channel is greater than the critical depth yc, the
flow is called as sub critical flow. It is otherwise, called as streaming flow or tranquil
flow. For sub critical flow, Froude number, F<1

Super critical flow:


When the depth of flow in a channel is greater than the critical flow, yc, the
flow is called as sub critical flow or torrential flow. For supercritical flow, Froude
number, F>1
14. Differentiate prismatic and non-prismatic channels.
Prismatic channel (May 2013)
Geometric dimensions of the channel, such as cross section and bottom
slope are constant throughout the length of the channel is called as a
Page 144 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

prismatic channel. E.g. Most of the artificial channels of circular, rectangular,


trapezoidal and triangular cross section are called prismatic channels.

Non- prismatic channel


Geometric dimensions of the channel, such as cross section and bottom
slope are constant for length of the channel is called as a non-prismatic
channel. Eg. All natural channels such as river, are non-prismatic channels.

15. Differentiate closed flow closed conduit flow and open channel flow.
[Anna Univ. Nov 2010]
Closed conduit flow Open channel flow
Water does not have with free surface. Water flows with a free surface.
Flow may be due to either by pump or by Flow is by obtained only by gravity
Gravity flow

PART –B (16 Marks)

16. A 3m wide rectangular channel conveys 12m 3 of water at a depth of 2m. Calculate

(1) Specific energy of flowing fluid.

(2) Critical depth, critical velocity & the minimum specific energy

(3) Froude number and state whether flow is sub-critical or super critical

(MAY/JUNE 2014)

17. What do you understand by critical depth of an open channel when the flow in it is not
uniform. (MAY/JUNE 2014)

18. (1) Calculate the specific energy of 12m 3/sec of water flowing with the velocity of
1.5m/sec in a rectangular channel 7.5m wide. Find the depth of water in the channel when
the specific energy would be minimum. What would be the value of critical velocity as well
as minimum specific energy.

(2) Derive an expression for critical depth and critical velocity (MAY/JUNE2014)
Page 145 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

19.(i) Find the rate of flow and conveyance for a rectangular channel 5m wide for uniform
flow at a depth of . m.The channel is having a bed slope of in 000.Take chezy’s constant
C=50.Also state whether the flow is tranquil or rapid.

(ii) What are the types of open channel flows and brief them? (MAY 2015)

20. (i) Calculate the specific energy, critical depth and velocity for the flow of 10m3/s in a
cement lined rectangular channel 2.5m wide with 2m depth of water. Is the given flow sub
critical or super critical?

(ii) Define wide open channel and also what are the important assumptions in hydraulic
parameters? (MAY 2015)

UNIT –II
UNIFORM FLOW
1. Define uniform flow. Give examples. (May 2011, Nov 2012)
Uniform flow is a fluid flow in which the velocity of any given instant does
not change both in magnitude and direction with respect to space.
Mathematically,
Example:
Open channel flow with constant depth of water
Flow through uniform diameter pipes.

2. List the factors affecting Manning’s roughness coefficient. [May 2013]


The following factors affecting Manning’s roughness coefficient are:
1.Surface roughness
2.Vegetation growth
3.Channel irregularities
4.Sitting and scouring
5.Stage (water surface elevation) and discharge
6.Transport of suspended and bed material.

3. What are the condition for obtaining most economical circular channel section

Page 146 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

for maximum velocity and discharge? (Nov 2011, May 2015)


(i)Depth of flow is 0.81 times the diameter of the circular channel.
(ii)Hydraulic radius is equal to 0.3 times the diameter of channel.
(iii)Angle subtended by water surface from the centre,
20=2570 0’
b.Condition for maximum discharge of circular section
(iv)Depth of flow is 0.91 times the diameter of the circular channel.
(v)Hydraulic radius is equal to 0.286 times the diameter of channel.
(vi)Angle subtended by water surface from the centre, 20=3080.

4. Define non-erodible channels. (Nov 2012, Nov 2014)


Channels which are constructed from materials, such as concrete, masonry and
metal can withstand erosion under all including most extreme conditions are called
as non-erodible sections.

PART –B (16 Marks)


5. (1)Write about the types of flow in channels.
(2) Find the rate of flow and conveyance for a rectangular channel 7.5m wide for
uniform flow at a depth of 2.25m. The channel is having a bed slope as 1 in 1000. Take
Chezy’s constant C= . (MAY/JUNE 2014)

6. For a rectangular with bottom width 40m and side slopes 2(: V, Manning’s constant N
is 0.015 and bottom slope is 0.002. If it carries 60m 3/sec discharge determine the normal
depth and derive Chezy’s formula. (MAY/JUNE 2014)

7. (i)A canal is formed with side slopes 2:1 and a bottom wodth of 3.0m.The bed slope is 1
in 4 00.Using Manning’s formula and assuming Manning’s n as 0.02 .Calculate the depth
of water for a discharge of 3.0m3/s for a uniform flow.

(ii) A trapezoidal channel with side slope 1 to 1 has to be designed to convey 10m3/s at a
velocity of a 2m/sec so that the amount of concrete lining for the bed and sides is the
minimum. Calculate the area of lining required for one meter length of channel.

(MAY 2015)

Page 147 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

8. Derive the expressions for the most economical depths of flow of water in terms of the
diameter of the channel of circular cross section:

(i) For maximum velocity and

(ii) For maximum discharge (MAY 2015)

UNIT-III
VARIED FLOW

1. Define varied flow. Explain its classification.


Flow properties, such as depth of flow area of cross section and velocity of
low vary with respect to distance is called Non-uniform flow. It is, otherwise, called
as varied flow. The varied flow is broadly classified into two types:
1) Rapidly varied flow (R.V.F)
2) Gradually varied flow (G.V.F)

2. Define gradually varied flow and rapidly varied flow in open channel.
[Nov’ , May’ &Nov’ ]
If the depth of flow changes quickly over a small length of the channel, the
flow is said to be gradually varied flow (GVF). Example: Back water in a dam. Depth
of water increases rapidly over a short length of the channel is called rapidly varied
flow.
Example: hydraulic jump.
3. State the assumptions made in the derivation of dynamic equation for gradually
varied flow. [Nov 2010, Nov 2011]
The following assumptions are made for analyzing the gradually varied
flow:
1.The flow is steady
2.The pressure distribution over the channel section is hydrostatic, i.e., streamlines
are practically straight and parallel.
3.The head loss is same as for uniform flow.
4.The channel slope is small, so that the depth measured Vertically is the same as
depth measured normal to the channel bottom.
Page 148 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

5.A channel is prismatic.


6.Kinetic energy correction factor is very close to unity.
7.Roughness coefficient is constant along the channel length.
8.The formulae, such as Chezy’s formula, Manning’s formula which are applicable,
to the uniform flow are also applicable for the gradually varied flow for
determining slope of energy line.

4. Distinguish between draw down and back water curves. [Nov 10]
When the depth of flow decreases along the flow direction becomes negative
and the surface profile is called a drawdown curve. When the depth of flow (y)
increases in the direction of flow, slope of water Surface is positive (upward slope)
and the water surface is known as Backwater curve.

5. What is backwater curve in gradually varied flow profile and give practical
example for getting this type of profile. (May 2014)
When the depth of flow (y) increases in the direction of flow, slope of water
Surface is positive (upward slope) and the water surface is known as
Backwater curve. Due to obstruction (dam), the water level raises and it has
maximum depth of water near to the dam as shown in figure is an example for
back water curve.

6. Classify surface profiles in a channel. [May’ &Nov’ ]


Based on channel slopes, channels can be classified into five types as stated
earlier.
1.Mild slope (M)
2.Critical slope (C)
3.Steep slope (S)
4.Horizontal slope (H)
5.Adverse slope (A)

7. What are the methods used to determine the length of surface profile?
Length of surface profile determined with the help of any one of the following

Page 149 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

methods.
1.Graphical Integration method.
2.Direct step method.
3.Standard step method.

8. Define the Afflux. [Nov’ ]


Afflux is defined as the maximum increase in water level due to obstruction
in the path of flow of water.

9. What is hydraulic jump in horizontal bed channel? [ Nov 2013, May 2015]
The rise of water level which takes place due to the transformation of the shooting
to the streaming flow is known as hydraulic jump.

10. State the uses of hydraulic jump. [May’ , 2013]


The kinetic energy of flow after the hydraulic jump is greatly reduced, which may
prevent erosion of the channel boundaries of downstream side.

11. Explain the classification of hydraulic jumps. [May’ , Nov 2011]


Based on Froude number (F), hydraulic jump can be classified into 5 types.
a .Undulation jump: The Froude number F ranges from 1 to1.7 and the liquid surface
does not rise shortly but having undulations of radically decreasing size.
b. Weak jump: The Froude number F ranges from1.7 to 2.5 and the liquid surface
remains smooth.
c. Oscillating jump: The Froude number F ranges from 2.5 to 4.5 and there is an
oscillating jet which enters the jump bottom and oscillating to the surface.
d. Steady jump: The Froude number F ranges from 4.5 to9 and energy loss due to
steady jump in between 45 and 70%.
e. Strong jump: The Froude number greater than 9 and the downstream water
surface is rough. Energy loss due to strong jump may be up to 85%.
12. Define surges. (Nov 2012 , 2013, May 2015)
When the flow properties, such as discharge or depth varies suddenly is called surge.
Example: sudden closure of gate.

Page 150 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

13. What are meant by positive and negative surges? [May 2012, 2014]
1. Positive surge – a surge producing increase in depth
2. Negative surge – a surge producing decrease in depth.

14. Define the term backwater curve. (May 2011)


The profile of the rising water on the upstream side of the dam is called backwater
curve. The distance along the bed of the channel between sections where water is
having maximum height is known as length of back water curve.

PART – B (16 Marks)


15. A rectangular channel 8.5m wide has a uniform depth of flow of 2.5m and has a bed
slope 1 in 3000. If due to weir constructed at the downstream end of the channel water
surface at a section is raised by8m, determine the water surface slope with the
respective horizontal at this section. Assume Manning’s n=0.02. (NOV/DEC 2013)

16. State and discuss the assumptions made in the derivation of the dynamic equation for
GVF. Starting from principles derive equations for the slope water surface is gradually
varied flow with the respect to
1. Channel bed
2. Horizontal (NOV/DEC 2013)

17. Differentiate GVF, RVF and define the term afflex, back water curve, and derive the
expression for the length of back water curve. (MAY/JUNE 2014)

18. A venturi flume is 1.30m wide at entrance and 0.65m in the throat. Neglecting
hydraulic losses in the flume, Calculate the flow if the depths at the entrance and throat
are 0.65m and 0.60m. A hump is now installed at the throat at a height 200mm, so that a
standing wave (hydraulic jump) is formed beyond the throat. What is the increase in the
upstream depth when the same flow as before passes through the flume?

(MAY/JUNE 2014)

19. (i) Briefly explain the direct step method and standard step method to determine the
gradually varied flow profiles.

Page 151 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

(ii) Derive the dynamic equation of gradually varied flow. (MAY 2015)

20. (i) What are the assumptions made in the analysis of hydraulic jump?

(ii) In a rectangular channel of 0.5m width , a hydraulic jump occurs at a point where
depth of flow is 0.15m and froude number is 2.5.Determine the specific energy, critical
depth and subsequent depth, loss of head and energy dissipated. (MAY 2015)

UNIT-IV
TURBINES

1. What do you mean by turbine?


The hydraulic machine which convert the hydraulic energy in to mechanical energy
is called turbine
2. Explain impulse turbine N o v ’
If at the inlet of the turbine the energy available is only kinetic energy the turbine
is known as impulse turbine.
3. Explain Reaction turbine (May 2013)
If at the inlet of the turbine the water possesses kinetic energy as well as pressure
energy the turbine is known as reaction turbine.
4. Explain tangential flow turbine
If the water flows along the tangent of the runner, the turbine is known as the tangential
flow turbine.
5. Explain radial flow turbine (Nov 2012)
If the water flows in the radial direction through the runner the turbine I called
radial flow turbine.
6. Explain inward flow radial turbine
If the water flows from outwards to inwards radially the turbine is called inward
radial flow turbine.
7. Explain outward flow radial turbine
If the water flows radially from inwards to outwards the turbine is known as
outward radial flow turbine.
8. Define axial flow turbine (May 2015)
If the water flows through the runner along the direction parallel to the axis of
rotation of the runner the turbine is called axial flow turbine.
Page 152 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

9. What is Pelton wheel:


Pelton wheel or Pelton turbine is a tangential flow impulse turbine. The water
strikes the bucket along the tangent of the runner . The energy available at the inlet of the
Turbine is only kinetic energy. This turbine is used for high heads.
10. What is Draft tube?
A tube or pipe of gradually increasing area is used for discharging water from the exit of
the turbine to the tail race is called draft tube.
11. Define Degree of Reaction (R)
It is defined as the ratio of change of pressure energy inside the runner to the change of
total energy out side the runner.
12. Define Francis turbine:
Inward flow reaction turbine having radial discharge at outlet is known as Francis
Turbine
13. Define propeller turbine:
This is an example of axial flow reaction turbine . Here the vanes are fixed to the hub and
are not adjustable.
14. Define Kaplan turbine:
This is an example of axial flow reaction turbine. Here the vanes are not fixed to the hub
and are adjustable.
15. What are the uses of draft tube? (May 2011 , Nov 2011 , May 2013)
1. The net head on the turbine increases.
2. Due to increase in net head the power and efficiency of the turbine also increases.
3. The large amount of rejected kinetic energy is converted in to useful pressure energy
16. What are types of draft tube?
1. Conical draft tube
2. Simple elbow tube
3. Mood y spreading tube
3. Draft tube with circular inlet and rectangular outlet.
17. What are the types of characteristic curves?
1. Main characteristic curves
2. Operating characteristic curve
3. Muschel characteristic curves
18. What is specific speed of the turbine? ( M a y 2 0 1 1 )
Page 153 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

It is defined as the speed of a turbine which will develop unit power under unit head.
19. What are the types of turbine according to direction of flow through runner?
(a) Tangential flow turbine
(b) Radial flow turbine
(c) Axial flow turbine
(d) Mixed flow turbine
20. What are the types of turbine according to the head at the inlet of the turbine?
(a) High head turbine
(b) Medium head turbine
(c) low head turbine
Where on e section is taken

PART –B (16 Marks)

21. A pelton wheel is required to develop 8575kw when working under the head of 250m.
the speed of the pelton wheel is 500rpm. The co-efficient of velocity is 0.98 and the
speed ratio is 0.46. Assume the jet ratio as 10 and overall efficiency as 82%. Determine
the number of jets, dia of the wheel, quantity of water required.
(NOV/DEC 2013)
22. What are the characteristic curves in turbines? List the types. Explain in detail with neat
curves. (NOV/DEC 2013)

23. (A) A jet of water having a velocity of 40m/sec strikes a curved vane, which is moving
with the velocity of 20m/sec. The jet makes an angle of 30 0 with the direction of motion of a
vane at a inlet and leaves at an angle of 900 to the direction of motion of vane at outlet. Draw
the velocity triangles at inlet and outlet and determine the vane angles at inlet and outlet so
that the water enters and leaves the vane with out shock.

(B) Derive impulse momentum principle. (MAY/JUNE 2014)

24 . (A) A pelton wheel is to be designed for the following specification.

Power (brake or shaft) - 9560kw

Page 154 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Head - 350m

Speed - 750rpm

Overall efficiency - 85%

Jet diameter - not to exceed 1/6th of the wheel dia.

Determine the following ,

1. The wheel dia.

2. Diameter of the jet.

3. Number of the jet required,

Take C = 0.985, Speed ratio = 0.45.

(B) Write down the difference between radial flow and axial flow turbine.

(MAY/JUNE 2014)

25. (i) Prove that the maximum efficiency is only 50%.When a liquid jet strikes a series a
flat vanes mounted on the periphery of a wheel.

(ii) Explain the working of radial flow turbine with neat sketch. (MAY 2015)

26. (i) In an inward flow reaction turbine the head on the turbine is 32m.The external and
internal diamters are 1.44m and 0.72m.The velocity of the flow through runner is constant
and equal to 3m/s.The guide blade angle is 10° and the runner vanes are rigid at inlet. If the
discharge at outlet is radial, determine the speed of the turbine and the vane angle at outlet
of the runner.

(ii) Derive an expression for specific speed of a turbine. (MAY 2015)

Page 155 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

UNIT-V

PUMP

1. How are fluid machines classified?


Fluid machines are classified into 2 categories depending upon the direction of
transfer of energy:
1. Turbines
2. Pumps or compressors.
2. Define multistage pump:
If centrifugal pump consists of two or more impellers the pump is called Multistage
pump. To produce a high head impellers are connected in series .To produce high discharge
impellers are connected in parallel.
3. What is Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH)?
NPSH is defined as the total head required making liquid flow through suction pipe to pipe
impeller.
4. Define slip of a reciprocating pump and negative slip:
Slip is defined as the difference between theoretical discharges and actual discharge.
If actual discharge is greater than theoretical discharge negative value is found this
negative value is called negative slip.
5. What is an indicator diagram? (May 2011, 2012 , 2013, 2014)
Indicator diagram is the graph between the pressure head and distance traveled b y
the piston from inner dead center for one complete revolution.
6. What is Air vessel?
Air vessel is a closed chamber containing compressed air in the top portion and
liquid at the bottom of the chamber . It is used to obtain a continuous supply of water at
uniform rate to save a considerable amount of work and to run the pump at high speed with
out separation.
7. What is the purpose of an air vessel fitted in the pump? (Nov 2010, May 2015)
1. To obtain a continuous supply of liquid at a uniform rate.
2. To save a considerable amount of work in overcoming the frictional
resistance in the suction and delivery pipes, and

Page 156 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

3. To run the pump at a high speed with out separation.


8. What is the work saved by fitting a air vessel in a single acting, double acting
pump? (Nov 2011)
Work saved by fitting air vessels in a single acting pump is 84.87%,In a double acting pump
the work saved is 39.2%.

PART –B (16 Marks)


9. A centrifugal pump having outer dia equal to 2 times the inner dia and running at
1000rpm works against a total head of 40m. the velocity of flow through the impeller is
constant and equal 2.5m/sec. the vane are set back at an angle of 400 at outlet. If the
outer diameter of the impeller is 500m, and width at outlet is 50mm. determine the vane
angle at inlet, work done by the impeller on water per second and manometric
efficiency.
(NOV/DEC 2013)
10. Draw the ideal indicator diagram and include the acceleration head frictional head
during the different strokes. And also write down the total work done during the suction
stroke and the middle of delivery stroke. (NOV/DEC 2013)

11 .(A) Calculate the Vane angle at the inlet of a centrifugal pump impeller having 200mm
diameter at inlet and 400mm diameter at outlet. The impeller vanes are set back at an angle
of 450 to the outer rim and the entry of the pump is radial. The pump runs at 1000 rpm and
the velocity of flow through the impeller is constant at 3m/sec. also calculate the work done
per kN of water and the velocity as well as direction of water at the outlet.

(B) What is meant by priming a centrifugal pump and why it is needed. (MAY/JUNE 2014)

12. (A) A single acting reciprocating pump (with no air vessel) has a plunger of 80mm
diameter and a stroke of 150mm it draws water from a sump 3m below the pump axis
through a suction pipe 30mm dia and 4.5m long. If separation occurs at a pressure of 80kpa
below atmospheric pressure, find the maximum speed at which the pump may be operated
with out separation. Assume that the plunger moves with simple harmonic motion.

(B) With the aid of an indicator diagram, discuss the effect of acceleration on the work done
and pressure head of a reciprocating pump. (MAY/JUNE 2014)

Page 157 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

13. i) A centrifugal pump is discharging 0.025m3/s of water against a total head of 18m.The
diamtere of the impeller is 0.4m and it’s rotating at 400 rpm.Calculate the head, discharge
and ratio of powers of a geometrically similar pump of diameter 0.25m when it is running at
2800rpm.

(ii) Write a note on cavitation in centrifugal pump. (MAY 2015)

14. i) A single acting reciprocating pump is installed 3.5m above the water level in the
pump.The suction pipe is 20cm in diameter and 10m in length.The piston is of 30cm
diamtere and has 50cm stroke.Determine the speed at which separation may take
place.Take H atm =10.3m of water and Hsep = 2.5m of water absolute

(ii) Define slip, percentage of slip and negative slip of reciprocating pump. (MAY 2015)

Page 158 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 159 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 160 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 161 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 162 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 163 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 164 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 165 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 166 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 167 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 168 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 169 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 170 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 171 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

CE6404
SURVEYING
II

Page 172 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

CE6404 SURVEYING II LTPC 3003

OBJECTIVES:
This subject deals with geodetic measurements and Control Survey methodology
and its adjustments. The student is also exposed to the Modern Surveying.

UNIT I CONTROL SURVEYING 9

Horizontal and vertical control – Methods – specifications – triangulation- baseline –


instruments and accessories – corrections – satellite stations – reduction to centre-
trigonometrical levelling – single and reciprocal observations – traversing – Gale‟s table.

UNIT II SURVEY ADJUSTMENT 9

Errors Sources- precautions and corrections – classification of errors – true and most
probable values- weighed observations – method of equal shifts –principle of least squares
-0 normal equation – correlates- level nets- adjustment of simple triangulation networks.

UNIT III TOTAL STATION SURVEYING 9

Basic Principle – Classifications -Electro-optical system: Measuring principle, Working


principle, Sources of Error, Infrared and Laser Total Station instruments. Microwave
system: Measuring principle, working principle, Sources of Error, Microwave Total Station
instruments. Comparis on between Electro-optical and Microwave system. Care and
maintenance of Total Station instruments. Modern positioning systems – Traversing and
Trilateration.

UNIT IV GPS SURVEYING 9

Basic Concepts - Different segments - space, control and user segments - satellite
configuration - signal structure - Orbit determination and representation - Anti Spoofing
and Selective Availability - Task of control segment – Hand Held and Geodetic receivers –
data processing - Traversing and triangulation.

UNIT V ADVANCED TOPICS IN SURVEYING 9

Route Surveying - Reconnaissance - Route surveys for highways, railways and waterways -
Simple curves – Compound and reverse curves - Setting out Methods – Transition curves -
Functions and requirements - Setting out by offsets and angles - Vertical curves - Sight
distances- hydrographic surveying – Tides - MSL - Sounding methods - Three-point
problem - Strength of fix - Sextants and station pointer- Astronomical Surveying – field
observations and determination of Azimuth by altitude and hour angle methods –
fundamentals of Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Page 173 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

OUTCOMES:

On completion of this course students shall be able to

 Understand the advantages of electronic surveying over conventional surveying


methods
 Understand the working principle of GPS, its components, signal structure, and
error sources
 Understand various GPS surveying methods and processing techniques used in GPS
observations

TEXT BOOKS:

1. James M. Anderson and Edward M. Mikhail, "Surveying, Theory and Practice", 7th
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001.

2. Bannister and S. Raymond, "Surveying", 7th Edition, Longman 2004. 3. Laurila, S.H.
"Electronic Surveying in Practice", John Wiley and Sons Inc, 1993.

REFERENCES:

1. Alfred Leick, "GPS satellite surveying", John Wiley & Sons Inc., 3rd Edition, 2004.
2. Guocheng Xu, "GPS Theory, Algorithms and Applications", Springer - Berlin, 2003.
. Satheesh Gopi, rasathishkumar, N., Madhu, Advanced Surveying, Total Station GPS and
Remote Sensing" Pearson education , 2007

Page 174 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

INFORMATION SHEET
COURSE INFORMATION SHEET

PROGRAMME : CIVIL ENGINEERING DEGREE : B.E YEAR OF STUDY :


2016-2017
COURSE: SURVEUING II SEMESTER: FOURTH, CREDITS : 3
COURSE CODE : CE 6404 REGULATION : 2013 COURSE TYPE : CORE
COURSE AREA/DOMAIN : SURVEYING, GPS & CONTACT HOURS: 5
GIS
CORRESPONDING LAB COURSE CODE: LAB COURSE NAME : SURVEY
CE6413 PRACTICAL II

COURSE PRE-REQUISTIES
C.CODE COURSE NAME DESCRIPTION YEAR/SEM
Students will be exposed to basic
CE6404 SURVEYING I surveying instruments and II/III
techniques

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. To explore the methods of geodetic measurements.

2. To know the methods of measuring control surveying methodology.

3. To compute survey adjustments.

4. To explore the modern methods of surveying like global positing system and total station.
To bring out the ways how the modern methods of surveying is applied in real world
5.
problems.

COURSE OUTCOMES
SNO DESCRIPTION
CO 1 To identify effectively which method of control surveying can be applied
CO 2 To effectively apply the trigonometrically knowledge in control surveying
CO 3 To expertise in error adjustments using surveying adjustment techniques
CO 4 To get high qualified knowledge in GPS and Total stations
CO 5 To get explore for application oriented case studies using modern surveying
techniques

Page 175 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

COURSE SPECIFIC OUTCOMES


SNO DESCRIPTION
SCO 1 To perform higher order of vertical and horizontal control surveying and equitable
distribution of errors
SCO 2 To provide highest possible degree of accuracy for site positioning, stakeout, grade
checking and positioning
SCO 3 To solve engineering problems in with advanced surveying techniques

Mapping Course Aims along with Course Final Results

S.No. Course Objectives Course Outcomes


1. To explore the methods of geodetic measurements. CO1, SCO1
2. To know the methods of measuring control surveying CO1,CO2, SCO1
methodology.
3. To compute survey adjustments. CO1,CO2,CO3, SCO1
4. To explore the modern methods of surveying like global positing CO2, CO3,CO4,
SCO1,SCO2
system and total station.
5. To bring out the ways how the modern methods of surveying is CO3, CO4,CO5,
SCO1, SCO2
applied in real world problems.

Page 176 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

UNIT I CONTROL SURVEYING

Two Marks Questions and Answers

1. What is meant by control surveying? (May/June 2016)


Control surveying is performed to achieve higher accuracy data of horizontal and vertical
coordinates.

2. What are the components of control surveying ?


Control surveying consists of research, measurements, calculations and reports detailing the
horizontal and vertical reference systems established for the survey.

3. What is triangulation surveying? (April/May 2015)


Triangulation is the tracing and measurement of a series or network of triangles in order to
determine the distances and relative positions of points spread over an area, especially by
measuring the length of one side of each triangle and deducing its angles and the length of
the other two sides by observation from this baseline.

4. Define quadrilaterals in triangulation (Nov/Dec 2015)

Every quadrilateral is a polygon with four sides of any length connected together at the
corners. The method of calculation for quadrilaterals is triangulation, which requires you to
know the lengths of one of the two diagonals.

5. Define Substance bar (April/May 2014)


A Substance bar is manufactured by Mr. Kern. The length of the substance bar is2m (6ft) for measurement
of comparatively short distance in a traverse. A Substance bar may be used as a substance base. The length of
the bar is made equal to the distance between the two targets.

6. Define geodetical observations ? (Nov/Dec 2015)


Geodetic surveying is the survey in which the curvature of the earth is taken into account
and higher degree of accuracy in linear and angular observations is
achieved. The geodetic surveys extend over large areas and lines connecting any two points
on the surface of the earth are treated as arcs. For calculating their projected distances on the
plans or maps, the correction for the earth’s curvature is applied to the measured distances.
The angles between the curved lines are treated as spherical angles. A knowledge
of spherical trigonometry is necessary for making measurements for the geodetic surveys.

7. What is Sub tense method?


In this method stadia interval is variable. The staff intercept is kept fixed while the stadia
interval is variable.

8. What is the tangential method?


In this method, the stadia hairs are not for taking readings. The readings being taken against
the horizontal cross hair.

Page 177 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

9. What is the application of Gale4s Table? (April/May 2015)


Gales traverse table is applied to calculate the latitude and departure of each line from the
known length and the reduced bearing of the lines. It is also used to find out the sum of all
northings and also of southings similarly of eastings and westings. It is also used to
determine the difference if any between northings and southings, also in eastings and
westings.

10. What is base net?


In advanced surveying like GPS is done by fixing some known points commonly called as
control points or control stations inorder to get the x,y,z coordinates with higher accuracy.

SIXTEEN – MARK QUESTIONS

1. What are the different corrections to be applied while measuring baseline in geodetic
surveying? (April/May 2015)

2. A steel tape 30m long, standardized at 10° c with a pull of 100N was used for measuring a
baseline. Find the correction per tape length, if the temperature at the time of measurement
was 20°c and pull applied was 150 N. Density of steel = 3000 kg/m3 . Weight of tape=5.88N.

γ.What is meant by a “satellite station”? Explain briefly.

4. The following reciprocal observations were mad from two points P and Q:
Horizontal distance between P and Q = 45128m
Angle of depression Q at P = 6’ β0”
Angle of depression P at Q = 8’ 10”
Height of signal at P =6.97m
Height of signal at Q = 5.63m
Height of instrument at P = 1.27m
Height of instrument at Q = 1.34m
Calculate (i) The R.L of Q, if that of P is 1248.65 m and
(ii) the average co-efficient of refraction at the time of observations.
Take Rsin1” = γ0.88m (Nov/Dec 2015)
5. From an eccentric Station S, 12.25 meters to the west of the main station B, the following
angles were measured BSC = 76° 25’ 1”; CSA = 54° 32’ 1”. The stations S and C are to the
opposite sides of the line AB. Calculate the correct angle ABC if the lengths AB and BC are
5286.5m and 4932.2m respectively. (April/May 2016)

6. Briefly explain the horizontal control and vertical control for setting out. (Nov/Dec 2015)

7. A steel tape is 30 m long at a temp of 15ºc when lying horizontal on the ground. Its c/s area is
0.08 cm2 and weight of 18.kg (18N) and. Co-efficient of expansion is 117 x10-7/ºc. The tape is
stretched over 3 supports which are at the same level and at equal intervals. Calculate the
actual length between the end graduations under the following conditions. Temp = 25ºc, Pull –
180 kg, E = 2.1 x 105 N/cm2.

Page 178 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

8. Find the difference of levels of the points A and B and the R.L of B from the following data.
Horizontal distance between A and B = 5625.389 m
Angle of depression from A and B = P β8’ γ4”; Height of signal of B = γ.886 m
Height of instrument of A = 1.497m ; Co-efficient of refraction = 0.07
Rsin1” = γ0.876 m R.L of A = 1β65.85m (April/May 2016)

9. State the factors to be considered while selecting base line and also explain with neat sketches
how to extend the base line in the field.

10. Explain in detail about the Classification of triangulation system. (April/May 2016)

11. What is mean by triangulation adjustment? Explain the different conditions and cases with
sketches.

12. Write short notes on: (1) selection of site for base line (2) Satellite station

13. What are the different methods by which the difference in elevation could be determined?
Name the corrections to be applied. (April/May 2015)

14. A nominal distance of 30m was set out with a 30m steel tape from a mark on the top of one
peg to mark on the top of another, the tape being in catenary under a pull of 100 N and at a mean
temperature of 70°F. The top of one peg was 0.25m below the top of the other. The top of the
higher peg was 460m above mean sea level. Calculate the exact horizontal distance between the
marks on the two pegs and reduce it to mean sea level, if the tape was standardized at a
temperature of 60°F in catenary under a pull of (i) 80 N (ii) 120 N (iii) 100N
Take radius of earth = 6370 km
Density of tape = 7.86 g/cm3 (April/May 2015)
2
Section of tape = 0.08 cm
Co-efficient of expansion = 6 x 10-6 per 1° F
Youngs modulus = 2 x 107 N/cm2

UNIT-II SURVEY ADJUSTMENT

Two Marks Questions and Answers

1. List out the errors of measurements (Nov/Dec 2015)


 Mistakes (or) gross Errors
 Systematic (or) Cumulative Errors
 Accidental (or) Random Errors.

2. What is a Mistakes (or) Gauss Errors


Depends upon the observer, a mistake cannot be corrected unless the observer get
training. The mistakes are errors that arise from inattention, inexperience, carelessness and poor
judgement of confusion in the mind of observer.

Page 179 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

3. What is a Systematic Errors


The systematic error is an error that under the same conditions will always be of the
same size and sign. It is simply due to the error in instrument. These errors may be
regarded as positive or negative according with whether they make the result too small
(or) too great. This effect is cumulative.
4. Accidental Errors
The Accidental Errors are those which remain after mistakes and systematical errors
have been eliminated and are caused by the combination of reasons beyond the ability
of the observer to control.
5. Classification of Observer Quantity:
An observer quantity may be classified as Independent Quantity and Conditioned
Quantity
6. Independent Quantity:
It is the one whose value is independent of the values of other quantities. It bears no
relation with any other quantity and hence change in the other quantities does not affect
the value of this quantity. eg. R.L of B.M
7. Conditioned Quantity
It is the one whose value is dependent upon the values of one (or) more quantities.
Its values bear a rigid relation to some other quantities. It is also called dependent
quantities .
8. State the principle of least square? (May/June 2016) & (April/May 2015)
The of the squares of the residual error should be minimum .
9. Direct Observation
A direct observation is the one made directly on the quantity being determined. Eg:
Measurement of base line.
10. Indirect Observation
An indirect observation is one in which the observed value is deduced from the
measurement of some related quantities. Eg: Measurement of Angle by repetition method.
11. Weight of an Observation
The weight of an observation is a number giving an indication of its precision and
trust worthiness, when making a comparison between several quantities of different

Page 180 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

worth. If a certain observation of weight 4 it means that it is 4 times as much reliable as an


observation of weight 1.When two quantities (or) observations are assumed to be equally
reliable, the observed values are said to be of equal weight (or) of unit weight.
12. Weighted Observations
Observations are weighted when different weights are assigned to them.
Eg: A= ° ’- wt 3. It means A is measured 3 times.
13. Observed value of a Quantity
An observed value of a quantity is a value obtained when it is corrected for all the
known errors. Observed value = Measured value ± errors (or) corrections.
14. True value (April/May 2015)
It is the value which is obsolete free from all the errors
15. True Error
A true error is the difference b/w the true value of the quantity and its observed
value. True value = True value – observed value. The most probable value of the quantity is
the value which is more likely to be the true value than any other value.
16. Most probable Errors (April/May 2015)
It is defined as the quantity which added to and subtracted from the most probable
value, fixes the limit within which it is an even chance the true value of the measured
quantity must lie.
17. Residual Error
It is diff b/w the most probable value of the quantity and its observed value.
Residual Errors = most probable value – observed value
18. Normal Equation
It is the education which is formed by the multiplying each equation by the co-
efficient of the unknown, whose normal equation is to be formed out by adding the
equation thus formed
SIXTEEN – MARK QUESTIONS

1.Find the Most probable values of angles A,B and C of triangle ABC from the following
observation equations.
A = 68° 1β’ γ6”; B = 5γ° 46’ 1β” ; A = 58° 01’ 16” (APRIL/MAY 2015)

Page 181 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

2.An angle has been measured under different field conditions, with results as follows.
β8° β4’ β0” β8° β0” 00”
β8° β4 40” β8° β4’ 40”
β8° β4’ 40” β8° β4’ β0”
β8° β5’ 00” β8° β4’ 00”
28° β5’ β0” β8° β5’ β0”
Find the (i) the probabale error of sing le observation
(ii) Probable error of the mean (APRIL/MAY 2015)

3.Describe the laws of accidental errors? (Nov/Dec 2015)


4.The following are the measured angles of a quadrilateral ABCD with the central point E:
Triangle Central Angle L.H Angle R.H angle
AEB 59° 0γ’ 10” 61° 00’ 54” 59° 56’ 06”
BEC 118° βγ’ 50” γβ° 0γ’ 54” β9° γβ’ 06”
CED 60° γβ’ 05” 56° β8’ 01” 6β° 59’ 49”
DEA 1ββ° 00’ 55” β8° 4β’ 00” β9° 17’ 00”
Adjust the quadrilaterals. (Nov/Dec 2015)

5.Discuss the laws of weights. (May/June 2016)

6. The following are the mean values observed in the measurement of three and α, ( and at one
station).
α = 76 4β’ 46.β” with weight 4
α+ = 1γ4 γ6’ γβ.6” with weight γ
+ = 185 γ5’ β4.8” with weight β
α+ + = β6β 18’ 10.4” with weight 1
Calculate the most probable value of each angle. (May/June 2016)
7. What do you mean by figure adjustment? Explain .
8. Find the most probable values of the angles A, B and C from the following observations at
a station P using method of differences.
a. A = 38 o ’ wt.
b. B = 32 o ’ wt.1
c. A +B = 71 o ’ wt .

Page 182 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

d. A + B+ C = 119 o ’ wt.
e. B + C = 80 o ’ 8 wt.

9. Form the normal equation for x, y, z in the following equations.


a. 3X+3Y+Z-4=0
b. X+2Y+2Z-6=0
c. 5X+Y+4Z-21=0

10. Also form the normal equation, if weights of the equations are 2, 3 and 1 respectively.

11. The following angles were measured at a station O so as to close the horizon
a. A=8304212811.75 wt.3
b. B=10201514311.26 wt.2
c. C=9403812711.22 wt.4
d. D=7902312311.77 wt.2

12. Adjust the angles by method of correlates.

13. Explain in detail about errors sources and error classification.

14. A surveyor carried out levelling operations of a closed circuit ABCDA starting from A and
made the following observations.
B was 8.164m above A, weight 2
C was 6.284m above B, weight 2
D was 5.626 m above C, weight 3
D was 19.964m above A, weight 3 (May/June 2016)
Determine the probable heights of B, C and D above A by the method of correlates.

UNIT-III TOTAL STATION SURVEYING

Two Marks Questions and Answers

1.What is a Total Station Surveying?


Total station surveying - defined as the use of electronic survey equipment used to perform
horizontal and vertical measurements in reference to a grid system (e.g. UTM, mine grid)

2. What is an Total Station Instrument?


A Total Station is a modern surveying instrument that integrates an electronic theodolite with an
electronic distance meter. Total Stations use electronic transit theodolites in conjunction with a
distance meter to read any slope distance from the instrument to any particular spot. They are
hence two essential surveying instruments in one and when used with other technology such

Page 183 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

as mapping software are able to deliver the 'total' surveying package, from measuring
to mapping.

3. What are the parts of Total Station Surveying? (Nov/Dec 2015)


a) Total Station (and tripod)
b) Electronic Notebook
c) Prism (and prism pole)
d) Computer interface
e) Batteries and radios

4. What are the types of Total Station Surveying


Slope Staking , Topographic surveys, Construction project layout , Leveling Traverse
surveys and adjustments, Building Face Surveys, Resections , Areas, Intersections, Point
Projections, Taping from Baseline.

5. What are the sources of Errors


Calibration of total stations
Horizontal collimation (or line of sight error)
Tilting axis error
Compensator index error
Vertical Collimation (of vertical index) Error
Total Station Calibration Procedure
Instrumental Distance Errors
Atmospheric Effects

6. What are the advantages of Total Station


 Relatively quick collection of information
 Multiple surveys can be performed at one set-up location.
 Easy to perform distance and horizontal measurements with simultaneous
calculation of project coordinates (Northings, Eastings, and Elevations).
 Layout of construction site quickly and efficiently.
 Digital design data from CAD programs can be uploaded to data collector.
 Daily survey information can also be quickly downloaded into CAD which
eliminates data manipulation time required using conventional survey
techniques.

7. What are the disadvantages of Total Station


 Vertical elevation accuracy not as accurate as using conventional survey level and rod
technique.
 Horizontal coordinates are calculated on a rectangular grid system.
 However, the real world should be based on a spheroid and rectangular coordinates must
be transformed to geographic coordinates if projects are large scale.
 Examples : highways, large buildings, etc.
 As with any computer-based application “Garbage in equals
 Garbage out”. However, in the case of inaccurate construction surveys “Garbage in
equals lawsuits and contractors claims for extras.”

Page 184 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

8. What is the working principle of Electro-optical system or EDM


An EDM uses electromagnetic (EM) energy to determine the length of a line. The energy
originates at an instrument at one end of a line and is transmitted to a "reflector" at the other
end from where it is returned to the originating instrument. The nature of the "reflector" is
dependant on the type of EM. If electro-optical (infrared or laser) EM is used then the
"reflector" is typically a passive medium which bounces the signal back. If the EM is
microwave, then the reflector is a second instrument which captures the incoming energy and
re-transits it back to the originating instrument.

9. What is Microwave total station instrument (April / May 2015)


Microwave total station instrument is a 3-3.5 GHz microwave frequency. Measurement
signal used by microwave devices Measurement signal used by microwave devices consists of
frequency modulation (FM) consists of frequency modulation (FM) superimposed on the carrier
wave, Operates on phase--shift principle, Corresponds to wavelengths of 1--8.6 mm, <60 km
range, 2 portable identical units 2 portable identical units -- master, remote.

10. Comparison between electro-optical and microwave total station instrument


(April / May 2016)
Electro-optical instrument use :
the velocity of light waves to determine the distance between two points.
both the visible lights (wavelength between 0.4-0.7) and the
infrared lights (wavelength between 0.7-1.2).
Infrared light much preferable because of the long wavelength.
Source of light: Mercury lambs, Tungsten.

Microwave total station instrument uses:

 Wave length λ = distance travelled during the period of one cycle.


 V = Velocity of emission
 F = Frequency in HZ

SIXTEEN – MARK QUESTIONS

1. Explain in detail about Electromagnetic Spectrum and its applications (May/June 2016)

2. Briefly describe the working and measuring principle of microwave system total station
(Nov / Dec 2015)
3. Explain in detail about the different types of EDM

4. Explain the working principle of EDM

5. Why phase comparison and modulation is preferred over time measurement in EDM

6. Explain the working principle of “Tellurometer”

Page 185 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

7. Explain the working principle of “Geodimeter”

8. Explain the working principle of “Wild Distomats”

9. Explain in detail about the sources of errors in Total station and EDM.

10. How is Traversing and Trilateration done using Total station? (May/June 2016)

11. Explain in detail about the fundamental measurements of the Total Station. (Nov / Dec 2015)

12.Enumerate the measuring principle and working principle of Electro optical surveying (Total
Station) with neat sketches. (APRIL/MAY 2015)

13. Brief a comparison about microwave systems and electro optical systems. Also bring out the
important precautionary measures and maintenance of total station instrument. (APRIL/MAY
2015)
UNIT- IV GPS SURVYING

Two Marks Questions and Answers


1. Define GPS
The GPS (Global Positioning System) is a "constellation" of approximately 30 well-spaced
satellites that orbit the Earth and make it possible for people with ground receivers to pinpoint
their geographic location. The location accuracy is anywhere from 100 to 10 meters for most
equipment.

2. What do you understand from the term “Satellite Configuration? (Nov/Dec 2015)
Tracking the signals from ground from the satellites revolving around the earth in such a
manners there won’t be any signal errors. The GPS space segment consists of a constellation
ofsatellites transmitting radio signals to users. The availability of at least 24 operational GPS
satellites, 95% of the time.

3. Write about anti spoofing (Nov/Dec 2015 & April / May 2015)
Anti-spoof means a process of encrypting P-Code information so that non-U.S. military user’s
participation in a telecommunications network or operation control of a cryptographic or
communications security system is prevented.

Page 186 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

4. List out the various segments in GPS (April / May 2015)


Space Segment, Control Segment and User Segment

5. What is hour angle (May/June 2014)


The hour angle of a heavenly body is the angle between the observer’s meridian and the
declination circle passing through the body. The hour angle is always measured westwards.

6. What is selective availability in GPS


Selective Availability is applied, positional accuracy from Block-II satellite was randomly
offset for Standard Positioning System users.

7. List out the applications of GPS


Providing Geodetic control.
Survey control for Photogrammetric control surveys and mapping.
Finding out location of offshore drilling.
Pipeline and Power line survey.
Navigation of civilian ships and planes.
Crustal movement studies.
Geophysical positioning, mineral exploration and mining.
Determination of a precise geoid using GPS data.
Estimating gravity anomalies using GPS.
Offshore positioning: shiping, offshore platforms, fishing boats etc.

8. What is hand held GPS (May/June 2016)


A handheld GPS can you help you find your destination quickly and safely. The global
positioning system, or GPS, pinpoints locations on the land and sea using a network of 24
orbiting satellites

9. Types of GPS in market?


TRIMBLE GPS AS A ROVER, GARMIN 12 CHANNEL GPS
MAGELLAN GPS - 315 SERIES

Page 187 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

SIXTEEN – MARK QUESTIONS

1. Explain the components of GPS? (April / May 2015, 2016)


2. Explain the anti-spoofing and signal structure in GPS?
3. Explain how GPS is used in triangulation, traversing and trilateration. (Nov/Dec 2015)
4. Explain any application or case study where GPS is effectively used.
5. Explain in detail the orbit determination and orbit representation of GPS. (April / May 2016)

UNIT-V ADVANCE TOPICS IN SURVEYING

Two Marks Questions and Answers

1. What do you understand by parallax? (Nov/Dec 2012) (Apr/May 2010)


Parallax is defined as the apparent displacement of an object due to the real displacement
of the observer. For example the apparent movement of the stars is due to the real
displacement of the observer from one position to another upon the earth’s orbit.

2. Distinguish between crab and drift. ( Apr/May 2010)


Crab:
The angle formed between the flight line and the edges of the photograph in the
direction of flight is designated by a term called crab. The crab is caused in the
photograph when the focal plane of the camera is not square with the direction of flight.
Drift:
Drift is caused by the failure of the photograph to stay on the predetermined flight line.
If an aircraft is allowed to go on its course without allowance for wind velocity, it will
drift.
3. What do you mean by sounding? (Nov/Dec 2010) (Apr/May 2011)
The measurements of depths below the water surface are called soundings. It is to find the
depth measurement in land with reference to a datum.

4. Distinguish between ‘terrestrial photogrammetry’ and ‘aerial photogrammetry’.


(Apr/May 2011 & 2016)
Terrestrial photogrammetry:
Photographs taken from a fixed position on or near the ground and the branch deals on
such aspects are called terrestrial photogrammetry.
Aerial photogrammetry:
Aerial photogrammetry is the other branch wherein the photograph are taken by cameras
mounted on an aircraft flying over the area.
5. What is meant by scale of a photograph? (May/June 2009)
Scale of photograph is obtained from the ratio of the distance of any two points on the
photograph and the distance between the corresponding points on the ground. The two
points chosen for scaling should lie nearly equidistant on either side of the principal point.

Page 188 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

6. Write the concept of map – marking in cartography? (May/June 2009)


While there are many steps involved in the map making process, they can be
grouped into three main stages: data collection, organization, and manipulation; map
design and artwork preparation; and map reproduction.

7. What is a fathometer? ( May/June 2012)


A fathometer is used for measuring depth of large rivers and seas with depth more than
10 m. by this instrument the depth of water is obtained by sending a sound impulse
from the surface of water towards the bottom of the river or sea bed.

8. What is Mean sea level (Nov/Dec 2015)


Mean sea level may be defined as the mean level of the sea, obtained by taking the mean of
all the height of the tide as measured at hourly intervals over some states period covering a
whole number of complete tides.

9. What is Cadastral survey


Cadastral means, “Registration concern Land Survey”. It is of one of based on national land
survey based on land survey law.

10. What is Hydrographic Survey (April/May 2016)


Hydrographic Survey is that branch of surveying which deals with the measurement of
bodies of water. It is the art of delineating the submarine levels, contours and features of
seas, gulfs, rivers and lakes.

11. Differentiate between ‘tilted photograph’ and ‘oblique photograph’. (May/June 2012)
Tilted photograph:
A tilted photograph is an aerial photograph made with the camera axis unintentionally. The
tilt from the vertical axis is usually less than 3°.
Oblique photograph:
An oblique photograph is the one made in an aerial photograph intentionally between the
horizontal and the vertical.

12. Define EDM. (May/June 2015)


Electro-magnetic distance measurement is a general term used collectively in the
measurement of distances applying electronic methods. Basically the EDM method is
based on generation, propagation, reflection and subsequent reception of electromagnetic
waves.
13.What are the equipments used for sounding? (Nov/Dec 2016)
i) Sounding rods or poles.
ii) Lead lines or sounding cables
iii) Fathometer.

Page 189 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

SIXTEEN – MARK QUESTIONS

1. Derive the parallax equation for the ground coordinates of a point.


2. A pair of photographs was taken with an aerial camera from an altitude of 500 m above
MSL. The mean principle base measured is equal to 90 mm. The difference in parallax
between two points is 1.48 mm. Find the difference in height between two points if the
elevation of the lower point is 500 m above the datum. What will be the difference in
elevation if the parallax difference is 15.5 mm?
3. Explain three point problem and strength fix in hydrographic surveying.
4. Explain cadastral surveying and its legal values.
5. Explain briefly components of hydrographic survey?
6. Comparison between Aerial photographs and maps
7. List the different methods of locating soundings. Explain any two methods.
8. Define stereoscope and list out the types of stereoscopes?
9. State the equipment used for soundings and explain them.
10. State stereoscope and explain briefly the basic types of stereoscopes.
11. Explain briefly about the Electro-Magnetic Distance measurement.
12. What is a three point problem in hydrographic surveying? What are the various
solution for the Problems? Explain any one method.
13. Explain briefly the different methods of prediction of tides.
14. Two straight T1V and VT2 are to be connected by a simple curve (based on chord of 20 m ).
Calculate the components of simple curve by Rankine’s deflection angle method. The angle of
intersection = 140 degrees. Degree of the curve = 5 degree. The chainage of V is 1618.8 metres.
(Nov/Dec 2015 & April/May 2016)

15. What is compound curve? Explain the step by step procedure for setting out of a compound
curve. (April/May 2015)
16. A,B, C are three visible stations in hydrographical survey. The computed sides of the triangle
ABC are : AB, 1000m, BC 1300m, and CA, 2000m. Outside this triangle (and nearer to AC), a
station P is established and its position is to be found by three point resection on A, B, and C, the
angles APB, and BPC being respectively 40° γ0’ and 64° 00’. Determine the distances PA and
PC. (April/May 2015)

Page 190 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Question Paper Code : 27108


B.E/B.Tech. DEGREE EXAMINATIONS, NOVEMBER/DECEMBER 2015
Fourth Semester
Civil Engineering
CE 6404 – SURVEYING – II
(Regulations 2013)
Time : Three Hours Maximum : 100 Marks
Answer ALL questions
PART – A – (10 X 2 = 20 marks)
1. Define quadrilaterals in triangulation
2. Define geodetical observations
3. List out the errors of measurements
4.State station adjustments
5.Write the parts of the Total Station.
6.What are the cares required for total station at the time of operation?
7.What do you understand from the term “Satellite Configuration?
8.Write about anti spoofing
9.List out the aims of route survey
10. What are the methods of locating soundings?

PART – B – (5 X 16= 80 marks)


11 (a) Briefly explain the horizontal control and vertical control for setting out. (16)
.
(OR)
(b) The following reciprocal observations were mad from two points P and Q:
Horizontal distance between P and Q = 45128m
Angle of depression Q at P = 6’ β0”
Angle of depression P at Q = 8’ 10”
Height of signal at P =6.97m
Height of signal at Q = 5.63m
Height of instrument at P = 1.27m
Height of instrument at Q = 1.34m
Calculate (i) The R.L of Q, if that of P is 1248.65 m and
(ii) the average co-efficient of refraction at the time of observations. (16)

Page 191 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Take Rsin1” = γ0.88m

12 (a) Describe the laws of accidental errors (16)


(OR)
(b) The following are the measured angles of a quadrilateral ABCD with the central
point E:

Triangle Central Angle L.H Angle R.H


angle
AEB 59° 0γ’ 10” 61° 00’ 54” 59°
56’ 06”
BEC 118° βγ’ 50” γβ° 0γ’ 54” β9° (16)
γβ’ 06”
CED 60° γβ’ 05” 56° β8’ 01” 6β°
59’ 49”
DEA 1ββ° 00’ 55” β8° 4β’ 00” β9°
17’ 00”

Adjust the quadrilaterals.


(OR)
13 (a) Explain the fundamental measurement system of total station (16)
(OR)
(b) Briefly describe the working and measuring principle of microwave system total (16)
station

14 (a) What are the types of GPS receivers? Explain in detail. (16)
(OR)
(b) How the traversing and triangulation is to be done using GPS? (16)

15 (a) Two straight T1V and T2V having bearing of 50° and 110 °respectively, are to be
connected by a 5° curve (based on chord of 40m). Due to inaccessible intersection
point, the following traverse is run from a point P on the rear tangent to a point S on
the forward tangent.
Line Length(m) Bearing
PQ 120 70°
QR 100 140°
RS 190 40°
The chainage of P is 1618.8m. Determine the chainage P.I, P.G and P.T. (16)
(OR)
(b) Briefly explain the application of remote sensing. (16)

Page 192 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Question Paper Code : 77066


B.E/B.Tech. DEGREE EXAMINATIONS, APRIL/MAY 2015
Fourth Semester
Civil Engineering
CE 6404 – SURVEYING – II
(Regulations 2013)
Time : Three Hours Maximum : 100 Marks
Answer ALL questions
PART – A – (10 X 2 = 20 marks)
What is called triangulation?
What is the application of Gales table
State the principle of least squares.?
What is true and most probable value
What is called trilateration in modern positioning system?
What is a microwave system?
List out the various segments in GPS
What is called anti spoofing?
State the difference between lunar tides and solar tides
Define MSL.
PART – B – (5 X 16= 80 marks)
11. (a)Explain the various tape corrections to be made while calculating the length of the base.
(16)
(OR)
(b) A nominal distance of 30m was set out with a 30m steel tape from a mark on the top of
one peg to mark on the top of another, the tape being in catenary under a pull of 100 N and at a
mean temperature of 70°F. The top of one peg was 0.25m below the top of the other. The top of
the higher peg was 460m above mean sea level. Calculate the exact horizontal distance between
the marks on the two pegs and reduce it to mean sea level, if the tape was statndarised at a
temperature of 60°F in catenary under a pull of (i) 80 N (ii) 120 N (iii) 100N
Take radius of earth = 6370 km
Density of tape = 7.86 g/cm3
Section of tape = 0.08 cm2
Co-efficicent of expansion = 6 x 10-6 per 1° F
Youngs modulus = 2 x 107 N/cm2 (16)

Page 193 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

12. (a) Find the Most probable values of angles A,B and C of triangle ABC from the following
observation equations.
A = 68° 1β’ γ6”
B = 5γ° 46’ 1β”
A = 58° 01’ 16” (16)
(OR)
(b) An angle has been measured under different field conditions, with results as follows.
β8° β4’ β0” β8° β0” 00”
β8° β4 40” β8° β4’ 40”
β8° β4’ 40” β8° β4’ β0”
β8° β5’ 00” β8° β4’ 00”
β8° β5’ β0” β8° β5’ β0”
Find the (i) the probabale error of sing le observation
(ii) Probable error of the mean (16)

13. (a) Enumerate the measureing principle and working principle of Electro optical surveying
(Total Station) with neat sketches.
(OR)
(b)Brief a comparison about microwave systems and electro optical systems. Also bring out
the important precautionary measures and maintenance of total station instrument. (16)

14. (a) With a suitable sketch, explain the salient features of Hand held and Geodetic receivers.
(OR) (16)
(b) Explain the various segments comprising the functioning of GPS with neat sketches.

15. (a) What is compound curve? Explain the step by step procedure for setting out of a
compound curve.
(OR) (16)
(b) A,B, C are three visible stations in hydrographical survey. The computed sides of the
triangle ABC are : AB, 1000m, BC 1300m, and CA, 2000m. Outside this triangle (and nearer to
AC), a station P is established and its position is to be found by three point resection on A, B,
and C, the angles APB, and BPC being respectively 40° γ0’ and 64° 00’. Determine the distances
PA and PC.

Page 194 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Question Paper Code : 77066


B.E/B.Tech. DEGREE EXAMINATIONS, APRIL/MAY 2016
Fourth Semester
Civil Engineering
CE 6404 – SURVEYING – II
(Regulations 2013)
Time : Three Hours Maximum : 100 Marks
Answer ALL questions
PART – A – (10 X 2 = 20 marks)

1. What is meant by control surveying?


2. Define weight of an observation.
3. Define the principle of least squares.
4. Define hand held receivers.
5. What is a satellite station and reduction to center?
6. Define Anti spoofing.
7. What is EDM?
8. List out the errors in total station.
9. Define hydrographic surveying.
10. Distinguish between aerial photogrammetry and terrestrial photogrammetry.

PART – B – (5 X 16= 80 marks

11(a) (i) What is meant by triangulation and describe classification of triangulation? (8)
0
(ii) A steel tape 20 m long standardized at 55 F with a pull of 98.1 N was used for measuring
a baseline. Find the correction per tape length, if the temperature at the time of measurement was
80 F and the pull exerted was 156.96 N. Weight of 1 cubic meter of steel = 77107 N. Weight of
tape = 7.85 N and E = 2.05 X 105 N/mm2, coefficient of linear expansion of tape per oF = 6.23 x
10-6. (8)

(OR)
(b) From an eccentric station S, 12.25 m to the west of main station B, the following angles were
obtained.
BSC = 760β5’γβ”, CSA = 540γβ’β0”
The stations S and C are opposite sides of the AB. Calculate the correct angle ABC, if the
lengths of AB and BC are 5286.5 m and 4932.2 m respectively. (16)

Page 195 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

12. (a) Find the difference of levels of the points A and B and the R.L of B from the following
Data.
Horizontal distance between A and B = 5625.389 m
Angle of depression from A and B = P β8’ γ4”
Height of instrument at A = 1.497 m
Coefficient of refraction = 0.07
Rsin 1 “ = γ0.876 m R.L of A = 1β65.85 m (16)
(OR)
(b) (i) Discuss various laws of weight (8)
(ii) The following are mean values observed in the measurement of three angles α, ( and ϒ at
one station :
α= 760 4β’ 46.β” with weight 4
α + = 1γ40 γ6’ 6β.6” with weight γ
+ ϒ = 1850 γ5’ β4.8” with weight β
α + + ϒ = 2620 18’ 10.4” with weight 1
Calculate the most probable value of each angle. (8)

13. (a) A surveyor carried out leveling operations of a closed circuit ABCDA starting from A
and made the following observations:
B was 8.164m above A, weight 2
C was 6.284m above B, weight 2
B was 5.626m above C, weight 3
B was 19.964m above A, weight 3 and
Determine the probable heights of B, C and D above A by method of correlates. (16)
(OR)
(b) What is a total station? Explain in detail the features of total station and merits and demerits
of a total station. (16)

14.(a) (i) Describe in detail the pulse method and phase difference method.
(ii) Explain in detail the sources of error in total station
(OR)
14.(b) What is GPS? Explain in detail the segments of GPS. (16)

15 (a) Explain in detail the orbit determination and orbit representation of GPS. (16)
(OR)
(b) Two straight T1V and VT2 are to be connected by a simple curve (based on chord of 20 m
). Calculate the components of simple curve by Rankine’s deflection angle method. The angle of
intersection = 140 degrees. Degree of the curve = 5 degree. The chainage of V is 1618.8 metres.
(16)

Page 196 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

CE6405 SOIL
MECHANICS

Page 197 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

CE6405 SOIL MECHANICS LTPC3003

UNIT I SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND COMPACTION 9


Nature of soil – phase relationships – Soil description and classification for engineering
purposes, their significance – Index properties of soils - BIS Classification system – Soil
compaction – Theory, comparison of laboratory and field compaction methods –
Factors influencing compaction behaviour of soils.

UNIT II SOIL WATER AND WATER FLOW 9


Soil water – static pressure in water - Effective stress concepts in soils – capillary
stress – Permeability measurement in the laboratory and field pumping in pumping
out tests – factors influencing permeability of soils – Seepage – introduction to flow
nets – Simple problems. (sheet pile and weir).

UNIT III STRESS DISTRIBUTION AND SETTLEMENT 9


Stress distribution - soil media – Boussinesq theory - Use of Newmarks influence chart
–Components of settlement –– immediate and consolidation settlement – Terzaghi‟ s
onedimensional consolidation theory – computation of rate of settlement. - √t and log t
methods– e-log p relationship - Factors influencing compression behaviour of soils.
UNIT IV SHEAR STRENGTH 9
Shear strength of cohesive and cohesionless soils – Mohr – Coulomb failure theory –
Measurement of shear strength, direct shear – Triaxial compression, UCC and Vane
shear tests – Pore pressure parameters – cyclic mobility – Liquefaction.
UNIT V SLOPE STABILITY 9
Slope failure mechanisms – Types - infinite slopes – finite slopes – Total stress analysis
for saturated clay – Fellenius method - Friction circle method – Use of stability number
- slope protection measures. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Murthy, V.N.S., Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering , CBS Publishers
Distribution Ltd., New Delhi. 2007
2. Gopal Ranjan and Rao A.S.R. Basic and Applied soil mechanics , Wiley Eastern Ltd,
New Delhi (India), 2000.

Page 198 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

3. Arora K.R. Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering , Standard Publishers and
Distributors, New Delhi, 2002.
REFERENCES:
1. McCarthy D.F. Essentials of Soil Mechanics and Foundations . Prentice-Hall, 2002.
2. Coduto, D.P. "Geotechnical Engineering – Principles and Practices", Prentice Hall of
India Pvt.Ltd, New Delhi, 2002.
3. Das, B.M. "Principles of Geotechnical Engineering . Thompson Brooks / Coles
Learning Singapore, 5th Edition, 2002.
4. Punmia, B.C. "Soil Mechanics and Foundations , Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2005.
5. Palanikumar. M, Soil Mechanics , Prentice (all of )ndia Pvt. Ltd, Leaning Private
Limited, Delhi, 2013.
6. Craig. R.F., "Soil Mechanics". E & FN Spon, London and New York, 2007
7. Purushothama Raj. P., Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering , 2nd Edition,
Pearson Education, 2013

Page 199 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

PANIMALAR ENGINEERING COLLEGE


DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL
COURSE INFORMATION SHEET

PROGRAMME : CIVIL ENGINEERING DEGREE : B.E YEAR OF STUDY :


2016-2017
COURSE: SOIL MECHANICS SEMESTER: SIXTH,CREDITS : 3
COURSE CODE : CE6405 REGULATION : 2013 COURSE TYPE : CORE
COURSE AREA/DOMAIN : GEOTECHNICAL CONTACT HOURS: 3
ENGINEERING
CORRESPONDING LAB COURSE CODE: CE6511 LAB COURSE NAME : SOIL
MECHANICS LABORTATORY

COURSE PRE-REQUISTIES
C.CODE COURSE NAME DESCRIPTION YEAR/SEM
CE6502 Foundation Engineering Analyze suitable type of III/V
foundation based on soil type

COURSE OBJECTIVES
SNO DESCRIPTION

Describe the behaviour and effect of water in soils


1
Examine modes of soil behaviour
2
Calculate and plot soil strength parameters
3
Describe methods of improving soil stability including reference to compaction plant
4
Undertake a variety of laboratory tests on soils
5
Calculate soil properties from test results
6

Page 200 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

COURSE OUTCOMES
SNO DESCRIPTION

CO 1 Understand the index properties of soil.

CO 2 Characterize the soil based on size, shape, index properties plasticity.


CO 3 Understand the concept of total stress, effective stress pore water pressure in soil.

CO 4 Understand the process of compaction and consolidation.

CO 5 Understand the shear strength of soil

CO 6 Determine the earth pressure on retaining structures.

CO 7 Perform different laboratory tests to determine index and engineering properties of


soil.

COURSE SPECIFIC OUTCOMES

SNO DESCRIPTION

CSO 1 Ability to understand the behaviour of soil under various stress conditions

CSO 2 Ability to understand determine engineering properties through standard tests and
Correlation with index properties
CSO 3 Ability to apply the knowledge of soil mechanics in construction field

Mapping Course Aims along with Course Final Results

S.No. Course Objectives Course Outcomes

1. Describe the behaviour and effect of water in soils CO1,CSO1

2. Examine modes of soil behaviour CO1,CO2

3. Calculate and plot soil strength parameters CO5,CSO2

4. Describe methods of improving soil stability including CO2 ,CO3, CO4,


reference to compaction plant CO6,CSO3

5. Undertake a variety of laboratory tests on soils CO2, CO4,CO5

6. Calculate soil properties from test results CO1,CO2, CO5,CO7

Page 201 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

UNIT-I
SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND COMPACTION
PART - A (2 marks)

1. Define degree of saturation. (AU Apr/May 2014)


The degree of saturation is defined as the ratio of volume of water to the
volume of voids.

2. What are all the Atterberg limits for soil? (AU Nov/Dec 2012)
Liquid limit
Plastic limit
Shrinkage limit

3. What is shrinkage limit? (AU Apr/May 2009)


The shrinkage limit (SL) is the water content where further loss of moisture
will not result in any more volume reduction.

4. What is Plasticity Index? (AU Nov/Dec 2012)


The plasticity index (PI) is a measure of the plasticity of a soil. The plasticity
index is the size of the range of water contents where the soil exhibits plastic
properties. The PI is the difference between the liquid limit and the plastic
limit P) = LL‐PL .

5. What is pore pressure? (AU Nov/Dec 2013)


Pore water pressure refers to the pressure of groundwater held within a soil
or rock, in gaps between particles (pores).

7. List the factors affecting Compaction. (AU Nov/Dec 2007& 2015)


Water content
Amount of Compaction
Type of soil
Methods of compaction
Admixtures

Page 202 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

8. Define Compaction.
Compaction means pressing the soil particles close to each other by
mechanical methods. It increases shear strength of the soil, and hence the
stability and bearing capacity.

9. Define Porosity. (AU Nov/Dec 2011)


The porosity n of a given sample is the ratio of the volume of voids to the total
volume of the given soil mass.

10. Draw the soil phase diagram. (AU Apr / May 2006)

11. Define Liquid Limit. (Nov/ Dec 2011)

It is the water content corresponding to the arbitrary limit between liquid and
plastic state of consistency of a soil.

12. Distinguish between Residual and Transported soil? ( May / June 2012)

Residual soil – The soils formed by weathering of rocks remain in position at


the place of the region. This soil is called as residual soil.

Transported soil- the soil which gets transported from the place of region by
various agencies such as wind, water, ice etc.

13. Give the relationship between sat ,G, w and e. ( May / June 2012)

Page 203 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

14. What are all the atterberg limits for soil and why it is necessary? (Nov/ Dec
2012)

Liquid limit, plastic limit and shrinkage limit is the atterberg limit. It is
necessary to determine the engineering properties of soil.

15. Differentiate between void ratio and porosity. (Nov/ Dec 2013)

Void ratio is the ratio of volume of voids to the volume of solids.

e= Vv/ Vs

Porosity is the ratio of volume of voids to the total volume of soil.

ή= Vv/ Vs

16. The most accurate method for the determination of water content in the
laboratory is ---------------- ( AU Nov/ Dec 2013)

Oven drying method is the most accurate method to determine the water
content of soil.

17. List various field compaction equipments along with its suitability.(May /
June 2014)

a. smooth wheel rollers b. Pneumatic tyred rollers

c. Sheep foot rollers d. Vibratory rollers

 Smooth wheel rollers is suitable for crushed rock, hard core,


mechanically stable gravel sands and gravel
 Sheet foot roller is suitable for compacted clay layers
 Vibratory rollers is suitable for cohesionless soils.
 Pneumatic tyred rollers is suitable for both cohesive and cohesionless
soil

18. Define the terms plasticity index and saturated mass density (Nov/ Dec
2014)

Page 204 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

The plasticity index is defined as the numerical difference between the liquid
limit and the plastic limit of a soil.

PI= WL- Wp

Saturated Mass density is defined as the bulk mass density of the soil when it
is fully saturated.

ρsat= Msat/V

19. What is compaction curve? (AU April/ May 2015)

A Compaction curve is plotted between the water content (%) corresponding


to he dry density. Optimum moisture content and maximum dry density is
determined from compaction curve.

20. Mention the classification systems of soil ( AU April / May 2015)

1. Textural classification system

2. Highway Research Board Classification

3. Indian Standard classification system

4. Unified Soil Classification System

5. Particle Size Classification

21. Differentiate between compaction and consolidation

Compaction Consolidation

Explusion of pore air Explusion of pore water

Dynamic load is commonly Static load is commonly applied


applied

Soil involves partially saturated Soil involves fully saturated

Relatively quick process Slow process

Page 205 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

22. In a saturated soil mass, if water content is 24% and specific Gravity of soil is
2.64 Estimate porosity. (AU Nov/ Dec 2016)
Given:
S= 1, w=24%, G=2.64
Solution :
e= wG/S
=0.24*2.64
= 0.6336
Porosity = e/1+e
= 0.636/(1+0.636) *100
= 38.8%

23. State whether the following statement is true or false and justify your
answer. The efficiency of compaction improves with increase in compactive
effort. (AU Nov/ Dec2015)
True, because it reduce the air voids and improve the strength.

24. What is the relationship between degree of saturation and air content? (AU
April / May 2016)
ac =1-S( where S= degree of saturation)

25. What is consistency index? (AU April /May 2016)


The consistency index or the relative consistency is defined as the ratio of the liquid
limit minus the natural water content to the plasticity index of a soil.

26. Define air content and Percentage air content in soil. (AU April /May 2016)
Air content is the ratio of volume of air voids to the volume of voids.
Percentage air voids is the ratio of the volume of air voids to the total volume
of the soil mass. It is expressed in terms of percentage.

27. Derive the relation between void ratio and porosity? (AU April /May 2016)
Void Ratio (e)= ή /(1-ή)
Porosity ή =e/(1+e)

Page 206 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

PART - B (16 marks)


1. Discuss the effect of compaction on various engineering properties of soils. (AU
May/June 2014)
2. A soil sample is a mixture of cohesion less and cohesive soils. Explain the
methods of determining the grain size distribution curve of the soil. . (AU May/June
2014)

3. A cubic meter of soil in its natural state weights 17.75 kN ; after being dried it

weighs 15.08 kN. The specific gravity of the soil is 2.70. Determine the degree of

saturation, void ratio, porosity and water content of the orginal soil sample. (AU

May / June 2014)

4. Discuss the effect of compaction on various engineering properties of soils. (AU

May / June 2014)

5. A sample of clay soil has liquid limit of 62% and its plasticity index is 32% .What
is the state of consistency of the soil if the soil in its natural state has a water
content of 34%. Calculate the shrinkage limit and degree of saturation if the void
ratio of the sample at the shrinkage limit is 0.70. Assume G= 2.7(AU Nov/ Dec
2014)

6. Explain the factors governing the compaction of soil. (AU April / May 2015)

7. In an undisturbed sampling ,903g of wet soil occupies a volume of 425 cc . on


oven drying , the weight of soil reduced to 802g. if the specific gravity of soil is
2.64 , determine i) bulk unit weight ii) dry bulk unit weight iii)Saturated unit
weight iv)submerged unit weight v)water content vi)void ratio viii)porosity and
degree of saturation (AU Nov/ Dec 2015)

8. The following are results of standard proctor compaction test performed on a


sample of soil.

Page 207 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Water content 5 10 15 20 25 30
(%)

Weight of wet 1750 2000 2100 2200 2160 2150


soil (g)

i) plot the water content – dry density curve and obtain the optimum water

content and maximum dry density.

ii) calculate the water content necessary to saturate the samplecompletely at

its maximum dry density , assuming no change in the volume. Take G= 2.65

and volume of compaction mould as 1000cc.

iii) plot zero air void line. (AU May/ June 2015)

9. i) A cubic meter of soil in its natural state weights 17.75 kN;after being dried it

weights 15.08 kN. The specific gravity of the soil is 2.70. Determine the
degree of saturation, void ratio, porosity and water content of the orginal soil
sample.

ii) A soil sample is a mixture of cohesionless and cohesive soils. Explain the
method of determining the grain size distribution curve of the soil. (AU May/
June 2016)

10. i) Discuss various factors influencing compaction behavior of soils.

ii) A soil sample has a liquid limit of 22% and plastic limit of 14%. The following
data are also available from sieve analysis:

Sieve size ,mm 2.032 0.422 0.075

% passing 100 84 39

Classify the soil according to IS classification. (AU May/ June 2016)

Page 208 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

11. i) A partially saturated soil sample collected from a pit has a water content of
18% and bulk unit weight of 20 kN/m 3. The specific gravity of soil is 2.68.
Estimate the void ratio and degree of saturation. What will be the unit weight of
the soil sample on saturation?

ii) Discuss the engineering behavior of compacted cohesive soils. (AU Nov/ Dec
2015)

12. i) Discuss in detail the engineering significance of the consistency limits of soil

ii) Explain the IS soil classification system for classifying fine grained soil. (AU
Nov/ Dec 2015)

UNIT-II
SOIL WATER AND WATER FLOW
PART - A (2 marks)

1. Define Permeability. (AU May/June 2012)


It is defined as the property of pores material which permits the passage of
water through its interconnecting voids.
For laminar flow in a homogeneous soil the velocity of flow (v) is given by
V= Ki
K= co-efficient of permeability
i-hydraulic gradient.

2. Define quick sand. (AU Nov/Dec 2011,&2015)


Sand is said to be quick sand condition when the flow is upward under a
hydraulic gradient, which reduces the effective stress to zero.

3. What is Frost Heave? (AU Nov/Dec 2013)


Water migrates upward from the water table to the capillary fringe. When the
atmospheric temperature falls to the freezing point & the ice is formed. This
results in an increase in the volume of the soil. This is known as frost heave.

4. List out the methods of drawing flow net. (AU May/June 2012)
Page 209 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Graphical Method
Electrical Analogy Method
Soil models
Plastic Models.

5. List the various of soil water (AU Nov/ Dec 2011)

1. Free Water

2. Held Water- i) Structural Water ii) Adsorbed Water iii) Capillary Water

6. What is mean by capillary rise in soil? (AU Nov/ Dec 2012)

The rise of water in the capillary tube is called as capillary rise.

Capillary rise hc = 4TS COSθ/gρd

Where,

TS= Surface tension (N/m)

θ= angle of upward flow of water

g= acceleration due to gravity

ρ= density of water

d= diameter of tube

7. Define Effective Stress (Au Nov / Dec 2014)

Effective stress equals the total stress minus the pore water pressure,
or the total force in the soil grains divided by the gross cross-
sectional area over which the force acts.

8. What is mean by total stress, netural stress and effective stress? (AU Nov/
Dec 2012)

 Total stress is the stress due to the self weight and external applied
forces
 Neutral stress is the stress carried by pore water
Page 210 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

 Effective stress is the stress carried out by the solid particles. It is


difference between the total stress and pore water pressure.

9. What is the importance of effective stress? (AU Nov/ Dec 2013)

i) Effective stress is an important factor in the consolidation of soil under


the application of external loadings

ii) It is an important factor in the development of the shearing strength of


soils and rocks.

10. State darcy’s law along with its limitations. AU May / June , April/ May
2015)

The law states that the rate of flow or discharge per unit time is proportional
to the hydraulic gradient. (Or) velocity is directly proportional to hydraulic
gradient.

Limitations:

a. Darcy’s law is valid (Flow is laminar)


b. The soil is completely saturated (Degree of saturation is 100%)
c. The soil is homogeneous (Coefficient of permeability is constant
everywhere in the soil medium
d. The soil is isotropic (Coefficient of permeability is same in all directions)
e. During flow, the volume of soil & water remains constant (No expansion
or contraction)
f. The soil and water are incompressible (No volume change occurs)

11. Differentitate seepage velocity from discharge velocity? (AU May / June

2014, NOV/ DEC 2015)

Discharge Velocity is obtained by Dividing the Total Discharge by the total


cross Sectional Area, Where Total cross sectional area Consists of void+solid.

Seepage Velocity is defined as the total discharge by the Area of voids only.
So Seepage velocity always greater than Discharge Velocity.

Page 211 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

12. State the assumptions in construction of flow net? (AU May / June 2014)

• Aquifer is homogeneous, isotropic

• Aquifer is saturated

• There is no change in head with time

• Soil and water are incompressible

13. State Darcy’s law. AU April/ May

The law states that the rate of flow or discharge per unit time is proportional to
the hydraulic gradient. (Or) velocity is directly proportional to hydraulic
gradient.

14. Define Capillary Water. (AU April/ May 2015)

Capillary water in the soil moisture located within the interstices and voids of
capillary size of the soil. It is held in the interstices of soil due to capillary
forces.

15. Estimate the coefficient of permeability for a uniform sand with effective
diameter of 0.18mm. (AU April /May 2016)

Solution:

K= c.D10

= 15*0.18

=2.7 cm/sec

16. Define Critical hydraulic gradient. (AU April /May 2016).

The hydraulic gradient under quick sand condition is called as critical hydraulic
gradient.

’= sat -w

Page 212 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

PART - B (16 marks)


1. The water table in a deposit of sand 8 m thick is at a depth of 3 m below the
ground surface. Above the water table, the sand is saturated with capillary water.
The bulk density of sand is 19.62 kN/m 3. Calculate the effective pressure at 1m,
3m and 8m below the ground surface. Hence plot the variation of total pressure,
neutral pressure and effective pressure over the depth of 8m. (AU Nov / Dec
2012)

2. Write down the procedure for determination of permeability by constant head


test in the lab. (AU Nov / Dec 2013)

3. What will be the ratio of average permeability in horizontal direction to that in


the vertical direction for a soil deposit consisting of three horizontal layers, if the
thickness and permeability of second layer are twice of those of the first and
those of the third layer twice those of second? (AU Nov / Dec 2012)

4. i) Explain the procedure involved in constant head permeability test with neat
sketch.
ii) A sample in a variable heads permeameter is 8cm in diameter and 12 cm high.
The permeability of the sample is estimated to be 10x10 -4 cm/ sec . if it is desired
that the head in the stand pipe should fall from 25 cm to 13 cm in 5 min,
determine the size the stand pipe which should be used. (AU April /May 2015)

5. i) Name the various methods of laboratory determination of permeability with


soil type in which they are best suited and explain any one method in details .
ii) A field pumping test has been carried out in a well was sunk through a
horizontal stratum of sand 15 m thick and underlain by a clay stratum. Two
observation wells were sunk at horizontal distances of 18 cm and 35m
respectively from the pumping well. The initial position of the water table was
2.5 m below the ground level. At a steady state pumping rate of 925l/min . the
drawdown curves in the observation wells were found to be 2.5m and 1.5m
respectively. Estimate the coefficient of permeability of the sand.

Page 213 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

6. A drainage pipe beneath a dam has become clogged with sand; coefficient of
permeability of the sand is 7.5 m/day. The average difference in head water and
tail water elevation is 21m and it has been observed that there is a flow of 160
liters per day through the pipe. The pipe is 97m long and has cross –sectional of
0.02m2. Find out up to what length of the pipe is filled with sand. (AU Nov/Dec
2015)
7. A flow net analysis was performed for estimating the seepage loss trough the
foundation of a coffer dam, results of the flow net analysis gave a number of flow
line is 6 and number of drops is 16 . The head of water lost during seepage was
5m. Assume the coefficient of permeability of the soil is k=4*10-5m/min. Estimate
the seepage loss per meter length of the coffer dam per day. Also estimate the exit
gradient if the average length of the last flow field is 0.9m. (AU Nov/Dec 2015)

8. What are the applications of flow net and explain briefly? (AU May/June 2014)

9. Derive an equation for to determine the coefficient of permeability in an


unconfined aquifer. (AU May/June 2013)

10. Derive an equation for flow through soil and hence derive the equation to
determine the seepage discharge through flow net. (AU May/June 2013)

11. Explain in Detail various uses of flow net. (AU May/June 2014)
12. What is a flow net? Describe the method used to construct the flow net. (AU
Nov/Dec 2013)

13. What is soil suction? How is it measured? What are the factors that affect soil
suction?

14. A Sand deposit contains three horizontal layers of equal thickness. The coefficient
of permeability of the upper and lower layers is 10-3 cm/sec and the
intermediate layer is 10-2 cm/sec. What are the values of horizontal and vertical
permeability of three layers and what is the ratio. Also derive the appropriate
equation require to solve the above. (AU Nov/ Dec 2014)

Page 214 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

15. Explain the procedure involved in constant head permeability test with neat
sketch. (AU April/May 2015)

16. A simple in a variable head permeameter is 8 cm in diameter and 12 cm high. The


permeability of the sample is estimated to be 1x 10-4 cm/sec. If it is desired that
the head in the stand pipe should fall from 25cmto 13cm in 5 minutes, determine
the size of the stand pipe which should be used. (AU April/May 2015).

17. i) For a homogeneous earth dam of 52m height and 2m free board , the flow net
has 22 potential drops and 5 flow channels. Calculate the discharge per meter
length of the dam, given k = 22x10-6 m/sec and exit hydraulic gradient.

ii) List the characteristics of flow nets.

18. i)The bed of river 5m deep consists of sand ( saturated unit weight of sand is 19.5
kN/m3). Calculate the effective vertical stress 5 m below the surface of sand.

ii) Define the total stress, Neutral stress and effective stress. Write also about their
significance. (AU April/May 2016).

UNIT-III
STRESS DISTRIBUTION AND SETTLEMENT
PART - A (2 marks)

1. What are isobars? (AU Apr / May 2011)


An isobar is a curved or contour connecting all points below the ground
surface of equal vertical pressure
2. What are isochrones? (AU Nov/Dec 2011)

The distribution of excess hydrostatic pressure u at any time t is indicated by


the curve, joining water levels, in the piezometric tubes; this curve is known as
isochrones.
3. What are the assumptions made in Terzaghi’s one dimensional consolidation
theory (AU Apr / May 2010& AU Nov/Dec 2008& 2015)

Page 215 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

 Compression and flow are one


dimensional.
 The soil is homogeneous.
 The soil is completely saturated.
 The soil grains and water are both incompressible.

4. Define pressure bulb? (AU Nov/Dec 2008 &2016)

The zone in a loaded soil mass bounded by an isobar of given vertical pressure
intensity is called a pressure bulb.

5. What are the factors which cause the compressibility of clays?


i. The expulsion of double layer water from between the grains
ii. Slipping of the particles to new post of greater density.
iii. Bending of particles as elastic sheet.

6. Define consolidation? (AU Nov/Dec 2010), (AU April/May 2015)


According to Terzaghi : Every process involving a decrease in the water
content of saturated soil without replacement of the water by air is called a
process of consolidation.

7. Define influence chart? (AU May/June 2012)


An influence diagram is the vertical stress distribution diagram on a
horizontal plane at a given depth due to a unit concentrated load

8. Define secondary consolidation? (AU April/May 2015), (AU Nov/Dec 2014)


Even after the reduction of all excess hydrostatic pressure to zero, some
compression of soil takes place at a very slow rate. This is known as secondary
consolidation. During secondary compression, some of the highly viscous water
between the points of contact is forced out from between the particles.

9. What is the assumption of Boussinesque equation? (AU Nov/Dec 2008)

Page 216 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

a. The soil mass is an elastic medium, for which the modulus of elasticity E is
constant
b. The soil mass is homogeneous
c. The soil is isotropic
d. The soil is semi-infinite

10. Define coefficient of compressibility (AU May/June 2006), (AU Nov/Dec


2013)
Coefficient of compressibility is defined as the decrease in voids radio per
unit increase of pressure.

11. What is meant by pre consolidation pressure? (AU Nov/Dec 2004)


Pre consolidation pressure an undistributed sample of clay is consolidated in
the laboratory and the pressure voids ratio relationship is plotted on a semi
log plot.

12. What is Newmark’s )nfluence Chart? AU Apr/May & Apr/May


(AU Nov/Dec 2013)
A chart consisting number of circles and radiating lines is so prepared that the
influence of each area unit is the same at the centre of circles; each area unit
causes the equal vertical stress at the centre of the diagram.

13. Give the applications of pressure bulb? (AU Apr/May 2015)


1. Design of Raft foundation.
2. Design of pile Foundation
3. Design of pad foundation

14. What is the use of Newmark’s )nfluence Chart in soil Mechanics? (AU
May/June 2012.
It is mainly used to determine the vertical stress under a uniformly loaded
area of various shapes. Newmark’s chart is based on the concept of the
vertical stress below the centre of the circular area.

Page 217 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

15. What are the Stages of consolidation? .( AU May/ June 2016)


The components of consolidation are
• Initial consolidation
• Primary consolidation
• Secondary consolidation
16.List the various uses of flow net in engineering practice. ( AU April/ May
2015)
i) Determination of Seepage
ii) Determination of Seepage pressure
iii) Determination of hydrostatic pressure
iv) Determination of exit gradient

17. What is the basis of the construction of New mark’s influence chart?(AU
April/ May 2015)
It is more accurate method of determining the vertical stress at any point under
a uniformly loaded area of any shape is with the help of influence chart or
influence diagram. A chart consist of number of circles and radiating lines, is so
prepared that the influence of each area unit is the same at the center of the
circles.
PART - B (16 marks)

1. Explain with a neat sketch the Terzhaghi’s one dimensional consolidation theory.
(AU Nov / Dec 2012 & AU May/June 2013 & AU May/June 2014)

2. A concentrated point load of 10kN acts at the ground surface. Find the intensity
of vertical pressure at a depth of 3 m below the ground surface and situated on
the axis of the loading. What will be the vertical pressure at a point at a depth of 5
m and at a radial distance of 2 m from the axis of loading? Use Boussinesque
analysis. (AU May/June 2014)

3. With neat sketches explain the procedure of determining of effective stress by


Newmark chart method. (AU May/June 2013)

Page 218 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

4. A building Column has a footing area of 2mX3m and transmits a pressure


increment of 150 kN/m2 at its base embedded 1.6m below ground level.
Assuming a pressure distribution of two vertical to one horizontal, determine the
consolidation settlement at the middle of the clay layer of thickness 4m with
saturated unit weight of 20 kN/m 3 and initial void ratio of 0.6 with compression
index 0.5 underlies fine sand deposit of 5m thickness. The water table is at a
depth of 2m ground level. The degree of saturation of sand above water table is
30%. Take the specific gravity of fine sand as 2.65 and the porosity is 40 %.(AUC
NOV/Dec 2014)

5. Describe the detail procedure of determination of vertical effective stress by using


Newmark chart method with neat sketch and equations. (AUC NOV/Dec 2014).

6. A Clay layer 4m thick is subjected to a pressure of 55 kN/m2. If the layer has a


double drainage and undergoes 50% consolidation in one year, determine the
coefficient of consolidation. Take time factor as 0.196. If the coefficient of
permeability is 0.020m/yr, determine the settlement in one year. (AUC May/
June 2014).

7. A concentrared load of 10kN acts on the surface of a soil mass. Using Boussinsesq
analysis find the vertical stress at point (1) 3m below the surface on the axis of
loading and (2) at radial distance of 2m from axis of loading but at same depth of
3m. (AUMay/ June 2014).

8. Discuss the factors influencing settlement characteristics of soils(AU April/May


2015)
9. A line load of 120 kN/ meters run extends to a long distance. Determine the
intensity of vertical stress at a point, 2m below the surface and (i) directly under
the line load, (ii) at a distance 2 metre perpendicular to the line. Use
Boussinesq’s theory. (AU April/May 2015)
10. A water tank has supported by a circular foundation of diameter 10.5 m is
resting on a soil stratum. The total weight of the tank including the foundation is
17,700kN. Estimate the stress due to the above load at 0.5m and 2.5m depth at
the centre of the water tank.
Page 219 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

11. Explain in details of the determination of coefficient of consolidation using logt


method. (AU Nov/Dec2015)
12. For a single concentrated load 1000 kN acting on the ground surface construct an
isobar for vertical stress is 40 kN/m2
13. A 8m thick clay layer with single drainage settles by 120mm in 2 years the
coefficient of consolidation of thin layer was found to be 6x10 -3cm2/sec. Calculate
the likely ultimate consolidation settlement and find how long it will take to
undergo 90% of this settlement.
14. i) Find intensity of vertical pressure at a point 3m directly below 25 kN point load
acting on a horizontal ground surface. What will be the vertical pressure at a
point 2m horizontally away from the axis of loading and at same depth of 3 ?
using Boussinesq’s Equation.
ii)List the Boussinesq’s theory assumptions and limitations.

UNIT-IV
SHEAR STRENGTH
PART - A (2 marks)

1. What are the differences to measure the shear strength of soil? (AU Nov /
Dec 2013)
a. Direct shear test
b. Triaxial shear test
c. Unconfined compression test
d. Vane shear test

2. What are shear strength parameters? (AU Nov / Dec 2008) (AU Apr / May
2015)
The shear strength parameters are c and φ
Where c is known as apparent cohesion
φ is called angle of internal friction.

3. What are the advantages of triaxial compression test? (AU Nov/Dec 2010)
1. Pore pressure changes and volumetric changes can be measured directly

Page 220 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

2. The specimen is free to fail on the weakest plane


3. The stress distribution on the failure plane is uniform

4. What is mean by deviator Stress? (AU Apr / May 2015)


A stainless steel piston running through the centre of the top cap applies the
vertical compressive load called as the deviator stress.

5. State the principle of direct shear test. (AU May/June 2012)


The principle of the test is inducing direct shear in a cylindrical soil sample.
The soil sample is confired by a flexible wire reinforced rubber membrane
usually inside metal rings. Vertical stress applied to the sample from the top.
The sample is sheared by moving the rings.

6. What is the effect of pore pressure on shear strength of soil? (AU May/June
2012)
As the pore water pressure of the soil increase the shear strength of the soil
decreases.

7. List out the advantages of direct shear test? (AU Nov/Dec 2014&2015)
1. The direct shear machine is simple and fast to operate.
2. A thinner soil sample is used in the direct shear test thus facilitating
drainage of the pore water quickly from a saturated specimen.
3. Direct shear requirement is much less expensive as compared to triaxial
equipment.

8. Write whether the following statement is true or false. (AU Nov/Dec 2013)
On the failure plane, the shear stress is maximum.
True.

9. What are different types of shear test based on drainage conditions? AU


May/June 2014)
i)Unconsolidated –undrained conditions

Page 221 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

ii) Consolidated –undrained conditions


iii) Consolidated –drained Conditions

10. Write down the Mohr’s coloumb Failure envelope equation AU Nov/Dec
2012)

Where,
= Shear strength
C= Cohesion
= Principal stress
= Angle of internal friction

11. Why triaxial shear test is considered better than direct shear test? (AU
Nov/Dec 2012)
i) There is complete control over the drainage conditions
ii) Pore pressure changes and the volumetric changes can be measured
directly.
iii) The specimen is free to fail on the weakest plane
12. What are the factors that influence the compression behavior of soils?
i) soil structure
ii) Water content
iii) Compaction effect
iv) Method of compaction
v) Permeability

13. Give one example each of the use of CU strength and CD strength results in
engineering practice ?
Based on strength envelope, drainage is not permited both during the
application of cell pressure and additional stress. There is no dissipation of
pore water . so the effective stress remains constant like total stress.
CU and CD test is generally use to determine strength of soil for the
application of geotechnical areas.

Page 222 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

PART - B (16 marks)


1. A saturated specimen of cohesion less sand was tested in triaxial compression
and the sample failed at a deviator stress of 482 kN/m2 when the cell pressure
was 100 kN/m2 under the drained conditions. Find the effective angle of shearing
resistance of sand. What would be the deviator stress and the major principal
stress at failure for another identical specimen of sand, if it is tested under cell
pressure of 200 kN/m2. Use either Mohr’s circle method or analytical method.
(AU Nov/Dec 2012)

2. Write a brief critical note on unconfined compression test (AU Nov/Dec 2012)

3. What are the advantages and disadvantages of triaxial compression test (AU
Nov/Dec 2012)

4. Explain with neat sketches the procedure of conducting direct shear test. Give its
advantages. (AU Nov/Dec 2012)

5. Write down a step by step procedure for determination of cohesion of a given


clayey soil by conducting unconfined compression test. (AU Nov/Dec 2012)

7. Describe the triaxial shear test. What are the advantages of triaxial shear test
over the direct shear test? (AU Nov/Dec 2011 & AU May/June 2013)

8. Explain the Triaxial compression test to determine the shear strength of soil. (AU
Apr / May 2011 )

9. Derive the equation for skempton pore pressure parameters. (AU May/June
2013)

10. Explain stress strain and volume change characteristics of cohesion less soils
during shear. (AU May/June 2014)

Page 223 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

11. Write down a step by step procedure for determin ation of cohesion of a given
clayey soil by conducting unconfined compression test. (AU Nov/Dec 2012)

12. A saturated specimen of cohesionless sand was tested in Triaxial compression


and the sample failed at a deviator stress of 482 kN/m2. When the cell pressure
was 100 kN/m2the effective angle of shearing resistance of sand. What would be
the deviator stress and the major principal stress at a failure for another
indentical specimen of sand, it it is tested under cell pressure of 200 kN/m2. Use
either Mohr’s circle method or analytical method. (AU Nov/Dec 2012)

13. What is the Mohr’s strength theory of soil? Derive the expression relating major
and minor principal stresses and shear strength parameters of soil. (AU Nov/Dec
2013).
14. The stress on a failure plane in a drained test on a cohesionless soil are as under:
Normal stress = 100 kN/m2, Shear stress = 40 kN/m2
i) Determine the angle of shearing resistance and the angle which the failure
plane makes with the major principal stresses.
ii) Find the major and Minor principal stresses (AU Nov/Dec 2013).

15. A shear vane of 7.5cm diameter and 11 cm length was used to measure the shear
strength of soft clay. If a torque of 600N-m was required to shear the soil,
calculate the shear strength. (AU May/June 2014)

16. Explain stress – strain and volume change characteristics of cohesionless soil
during shear. (AU May/June 2014)

17. A direct shear test was performed on a 60mmX60mm sample of dry sand. The
normal load was 360N. The failure occurred at a shear load of 180 N. Plot the
mohr strength envelope, and determine angle of internal friction. Assume C=0.
Also determine principal stresses at failure. (AU May/June 2014)

Page 224 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

18. The table gives the data at failure obtained from consolidated undrained tri- axial
tests on three identical cylindrical specimens of saturated clay.

Sample No 1 2 3

Confining pressure,(kN/m2) 200 300 450

Principal stress difference ,(kN/m2) 244 314 384

Pore water pressure, u,(kN/m2) 55 107 159

Determine the cohesion and angle of internal friction of the soil in terms of (1)
total stresses and (2) effective stresses. (AU May/June 2014)

19. Explain un-confined compression test with neat sketch. (AU April/May 2015)

20. A particular soil failed under a major principal stressof 300 kN/m 2 with a
corresponding minor principal stress of 100 kN/m 2 . If, for the same soil, the mior
principal stress had been 200 kN/m2, determine what the major principal stress
would have been if i φ= 300 ii φ= 00. (AU April /May 2015)

21. An earthen embankment is constructed in a soil having a cohesion C= 45


kN/m2and angle of internal friction is 26®. Determine the total and effective
shear strength of the soil on a horizontal plane at a depth of 10m below the top of
an embankment having a bulk unit weight is 21 kN/m3and the pore water
pressure at this depth is 15 kN/m2 . (AU Nov/ Dec 2015)

22. Draw the Mohr- coulomb failure envelopes of CU ,CD and UU tests sandy soils and

comment on the shear strength parameter. (AU Nov/ Dec 2015).

23. An unconfined compression test was carried out on a sample of clay had a
diameter of 38 mm and a length of 76mm. The load at failure measure by the
proving ring was 45N and the axial deformation of the sample at failure was 15
mm. Estimate the unconfines=d compressive strength , undrained strength and
undrained cohesion of the clay sample.

Page 225 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

24. Explain the Triaxial shear tests based on drainage and their applicability. (AU
May/June 2016)

25. i)What is the shear strength interms of effective stress on a plane within a
saturated soil mass at a appoint where the normal stress is 295kN/m 2 and the
pore water pressure is 120 295kN/m 2. the effective stress parameters for the
soil are c’=12 kN/m2 and angle of internal friction =300. (AU May/June 2016)

ii) Write the advantages, disadvantages and limitations of direct shear test. (AU
May/June 2016)

UNIT-V
SLOPE STABILITY
PART - A (2 marks)

1. What do you mean by Tension crack? (AU May/June2012&2015)


A tension cracks is usually developed in the soil near the top of the wall, up to a
depth z0. Also the total net pressure up to a depth 2z0 is zero. This means that a
cohesive soil should be able to stand with a vertical face up to a depth 2z0
without any lateral support.

2. What do you mean by slide? (AU Apr / May 2011)


The failure of a mass of soil located beneath a slope a called a slide.

3. What are the Factors of safety used in stability Analysis of slopes? (AU
Nov/ Dec 2011)
1. Factor of safety with respect to cohesion assuming to be fully
mobilized.
2. Factor of safety with respect to friction assuming to be fully mobilized.
3. Factor of safety with respect to shear strength
4. Factor of safety with respect to height.

5. What are the two types of slope failure? (AU Nov/Dec 2010)
Page 226 of 238
II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

The following are the two types of slope failure.


Face failure
Toe Failure

6. What are the different methods used for analysis of finite slope. (AU
May/June 2013)
1. Culmann’s method of planar failure surface
2. Swedish circle method (slip circle method)
3. Friction circle method
4. Bishop’s method

7. Write down the assumptions made in the analysis of slope?

1. The stress is assumed to be two dimensional.


2. Coulomb equation for shear strength is applicable and parameters and Ф
are known
3. Seepage pressure was estimated from the assumed seepage conditions
and water levels.
4. The conditions of plastic failure are assumed to be satisfied along the
critical surface.

8. What are the types of slip surface in a Finite slope? (AU Nov/Dec 2006)
1. Planar failure surface
2. Circular failure surface
3. Non circular failure surface
9. What do you meant by finite and infinite slope (AU Nov/Dec 2012&2015)
An Infinite slope is very large in extent and is theoretically infinite and the
properties of the soil will be same at identical points. A Finite slope is limited in
extent and the properties of the soil will not are same at identical depths So that
the slip surface may be curved.

Page 227 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

10. Define Stability number? (AU Apr / May 2008)


The force causing instability is the weight of the wedge which I equal to unit
weight γ and the area of the wedge which ) proportion l to the square of the
height H. It is a dimensionless quantity.

11. What is mean by sudden or rapid draw down? (AU Nov/Dec 2011)
When the reservoir is suddenly emptied without allowing any appreciable
change in the water level within saturated mass of soil. This state is known as
sudden drawdown (or) rapid draw down.

12.List out the types of slope failure ? (AU Nov/Dec 2013) (AU Nov/Dec 2014)
Slope failure classified in to three types:
1. Face Failure
2. Toe Failure
3. Base Failure

13. What are the different factor of safety used in the stability of slope. (AU
Nov/Dec 2013)
 Factor of safety with respect to cohesion
 Factor of safety with respect to friction.
 Factor of safety with respect to shear strength

14. Differntiate finite slope and Infinite slope? (AU Nov/Dec 2012& May/ June
2014& Nov/Dec2015)
Finite Slope-If the slope is of limited extent, it is called as finite slope.
Infinite Slope: If a slope represents the boundary surface of a semi- infinite
soil mass, and the soil properties for all identical depths below the surface are
constant., it is called as infinite slope.

15. write the expression for stability number ? (AU Apr/May 2015) (AU
Nov/Dec 2014)

Page 228 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Sn= Cm/ H
Where ,
Sn = Stability Number
Cm= Mobilised cohesion(kPa)
= Density of soil(kN/m2)
H= depth (m)

16. Mention the methods used to find stability of slopes (AU Apr/May 2015)
(AU Nov/Dec 2014 &May/ June 2014) (AU Nov/Dec 2012)
i Culman’s method
ii) Friction circle method
iii) Swedich circle Method
iv Bishop’s stability analysis
v Taylor’s stability number

17. State the influence of tension crack in factor of safety if the cracks are
filled with water and with out water. (AU Nov/Dec 2015)
If a tension crack of depth develops, water will enter in the crack , exerting a
hydrostatic pressure force acting on the portion of DE at a height Z o/3 from E.
Hence the arc portion DE will be ineffective in resisting the slide.
If the cracks are not filled with water there is no effect in the slopes. The slope
should be stable condition.

18. How Taylor’s stability number is utilized for stability analysis?


The stability number is a function of cohesion, factor of safety, unit weight and
height of slope. For long term stability, the drained cohesion and angle of
shearing resistance has to be used. Assuming no change in water content and
neglecting seepage effects, an approximate idea of the long term stability may be
obtained from taylor’s stability curves.

19. Mention the methods of protecting slopes of soils. (AU April/May 2015)
i) Drainage helps in reducing the seepage forces.
ii) Grouting and injection of cement help in increasing the stability

Page 229 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

iii) Retaining wall can be provided for lateral support


iv) Stabilization of soil improve the stability of slopes

20. what are the factors leading to the failure of slopes. (AU May/June 2016)
i)Gravitational force
ii)Force due to seepage water
iii) Erosion of the surface of slopes due to flowing water
iv)the sudden lowering of water adjacent to a slope
v) Forces due to earthquake.

21. what are the three forces acting in a circular failure while analysis through
friction circle method? (AU May/June 2016)
i) Cohesive force
ii) weight
iii) Reaction force
PART - B (16 marks)

1. Write down the procedure for determining the factor of safety of a given slope
by friction circle method. (AU Apr/May 2012 & May/ June 2014 AU Apr/May
2011 & Apr / May 2009)

2. A canal is to be excavated to a depth of 6m below ground level through a soil


having the following characteristics c = 15 kN/m 2, Φ = 20°, e = 0.9 and G = 2. .
The slope of the banks is 1 in 1. Determine the factor of safety with respect
to cohesion when the canal runs full. What will be the factor of safety if the
canal is rapidly emptied completely? (AU May/June 2012)

3. What are different types of slope failures? Discuss the various methods for
improving the stability of slopes. (AU Nov/Dec 2011 & May/ June 2014)

3. Explain the Swedish slip circle method in detail. (AU Apr/May 2011.
AU Nov/Dec 2011 &May/June 2013 )

Page 230 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

5. Explain any four methods of slope protection. (AU Apr/May 2011&


May/June 2013)

6. Calculate the factor of safety with respect to cohesion, of a clay slope laid at
1 in 2 to a height of 10 m, if the angle of internal friction c = 25kN /m2 and φ
= 100, Ύ= 19kN/m2.what will be the critical height of the slope in the
soil.(AU Apr/May 2015)

7. Explain the following sketch: (AU Apr/May 2015)


i) Total stress analysis
ii) Effective stress analysis
8. Explain the fellenius method of slices of finding out the stability. (AU
May/June 2016)
9. i) Explain different slope protection measures (AU May/June 2016)
ii) Differentiate between finite slope and infinite slope.

Page 231 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 232 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 233 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 234 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 235 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 236 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 237 of 238


II YEAR QUESTION BANK DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING - PEC

Page 238 of 238

You might also like